2003 accord coupe online reference owner's manual...

2003 Accord Coupe Online Reference Owner's Manual

Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.

For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i

A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii

Your Car at a Glance ...........................................................................................................................2 Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your car's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 59 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 121 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 223 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new car, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 239 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 271 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 355 Tips on cleaning and protecting your car. Things to look for if your car ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 363 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 393 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 409 A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 413 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index ..................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This Owner’s Manual should be considereda permanent part of the car, and shouldremain with the car when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe Accord Coupe. You may finddescriptions of equipment and features thatare not on your particular model.

Owner’s Identif ication

Si prefiere este Manual delPropietario en español, comuníquesecon el concesionario Honda.

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so youcan refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helpsto keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. Whenyour car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda dealer’s staff isspecially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Honda. YourHonda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2003 Honda Accord was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

－

－

－

－－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thiscar safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your car. You must useyour own good judgement.

on the car.

how to use this car correctly and safely.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety Section

Safety Headings

Safety MessagesSafety Labels

Instructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

Your Car at a Glance

2

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MIRROR CONTROLS

AUDIO SYSTEMDIGITAL CLOCK

INSTRUMENT PANEL (P.61)

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONMANUAL TRANSMISSION

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS(P.122)

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM(P.129)

FUEL FILL DOOR/TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

(P.108)

(P.86)

(P.103)

(P.225, 91) (P.226)(P.243, 245)

(P.248)

(P.153, 171, 193)(P.148, 163, 187)

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS(P.79)

＊

＊

Only on cars equipped with Navigation System. Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.:

Your Car at a Glance

3

HORN

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS(P.74/77)

(P.76)

TILT/TELESCOPICADJUSTMENT(P.80)

EX-V6 model without Navigation System is shown.

CRUISECONTROLBUTTONS

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

(P.79)

MOONROOF SWITCH

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS(P.211)

(P.107)

VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES

(P.77, 79)

(P.214)

(P.79)

(P.73)

TRACTION CONTROLSYSTEM ON/OFFSWITCH (P.259)

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your car.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

..................Seats and Seat-Backs . 11..........................Head Restraints . 11

..................................Door Locks . 11........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12

............................Protecting Adults . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 14

............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 16

5. Fasten and Position the Seat.....................................Belts . 16

....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 187. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

........................Protecting Children . 21All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 21Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 22The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks to...............................Children . 22

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 24

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 25

...Additional Safety Precautions . 25General Guidelines for Using

...............................Child Seats . 26.......................Protecting Infants . 30

.........Protecting Small Children . 34

.......Protecting Larger Children . 38Using Child Seats with

.....................................Tethers . 42.............................Using LATCH . 43

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 46

..Seat Belt System Components . 46......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 46

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 47

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 48Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 49........................SRS Components . 49

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 49

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 51How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 52..How the SRS Indicator Works . 52

How the Side Airbag Cutoff...........Indicator Light Works . 53

.............................Airbag Service . 55...Additional Safety Precautions . 55

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56...................................Safety Labels . 57

Driver and Passenger Safety


5

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

.)

Children are safest when they areproperly restrained in the back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage .)

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page .)

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your car is equippedwith airbags, make sure you andyour passengers always wear yourseat belts, and wear them properly.(See page .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

21

16

9

274


Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Restrain All Children

Keep Your Car in Safe ConditionDon’t Drink and Drive

6

＊

＊

＊

Your car is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; a collapsible steering column;and seat belt tensioners thatautomatically tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.

CONTINUED


Your Car’s Safety Features

7

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)(7)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(11)

(9)

(6)

(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Seat Belt Tensioners

If equipped:

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

For your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your car isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your car has airbags.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can’t take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand

In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.



Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

always wear your seat beltsproperly.

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the car andagainst other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the car.

Your car also has side airbags to helpprotect the upper torso of the driveror a front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact.

Your car has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with dual-stage, dual-threshold front airbags tohelp protect the heads and chests ofthe driver and a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe frontalcollision.

CONTINUED

Optional on LX modelStandard on EX and all V 6 models



Airbags

What you should do:

9

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

Your car also has side curtainairbags. During a moderate to severeside impact, side curtain airbags helpto protect the heads of the driver,front seat passenger, and passengerssitting in the outer rear seatingpositions.

Standard on U.S. EX-V6 model



What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

10

Your car’s seats are designed to keepyou in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the car, or by aninflating airbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt’s effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat’soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever the car ismoving.

Head restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Keeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe car during a crash. It also helpsprevent occupants from accidentallyopening a door and falling out, andoutsiders from unexpectedly openingyour doors.

Seats & Seat-Backs Head Restraints

Door Locks

What you should do:


Driver and Passenger Safety 11

To make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your car’s safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page

).

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin the back seat (see page ).

Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page).

Head restraints are properlyadjusted (see page ).

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page ).

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Both doors are closed and locked(see page ).

16

21

14

15

16

13

234

Pre-Drive Safety Checklist


Driver and Passenger Safety12

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

After everyone has entered the car,be sure the doors are closed andlocked.

Your car has a door monitor light onthe instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door is not tightlyclosed.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the car is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the car during a crash.

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

38

86

Introduction Close and Lock the Doors1.

Protecting Adults


Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or from beingstruck by an inflating front airbagduring a crash.

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat away from thesteering wheel to the farthestdistance that allows you to maintainfull control of the car.

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversadjust the seat so the center of thechest is at least 10 inches (25cm)away from the center of the steeringwheel. In addition to adjusting theseat, you can adjust the steeringwheel in and out (see page ).

Also make sure your front seatpassenger moves the seat as far tothe rear as possible.

80

94

Adjust the Front Seats2.

Protecting Adults


Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the front airbag inflates.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

94

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

Protecting Adults


Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

99

Adjust the Head Restraints Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

4. 5.

Protecting Adults


Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack from theshoulder part, then check that thebelt rests across the center of yourchest and over your shoulder. Thisspreads the forces of a crash overthe strongest bones in your upperbody.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourHonda dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

46

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt.

Protecting Adults


Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thecar is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the car, orby being struck by an inflating frontairbag. Being struck by an inflatingside airbag can result in possiblyserious injuries.

80


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6. 7.

18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your car’s airbagsand other safety features, you mustsit properly and wear your seat beltproperly.

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a car.

Protecting Adults

Advice for Pregnant Women


If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp objects inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

If aside airbag or a side curtain airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thecar and hurt someone.

If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel or on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe front airbag inflates.

Protecting Adults


Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

On models with side airbags orside curtain airbags, do not attachhard objects on or near a door.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

20

(See page.)

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how toprotect young passengers.

So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your car, be sure toread this section. (See page .)

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

26

38

properly

CONTINUED


Protecting Children

All Children Must Be Restrained

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt, and use abooster, if needed.

21

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

During acrash, the belt could press deepinto the child and cause veryserious injuries.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it inflates with tremendousspeed.If you are wearing a seat belt, the

child can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour car crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a600-lb (275 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.


Protecting Children

Additional Precautions to ParentsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand an infant or child.

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Children Should Sit in the BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks to Children

22

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your car haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, in a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

38

CONTINUED

Small Children

Larger Children

U.S. Models

Children who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Protecting Children


To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your car has warning labelson the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Your car has three seating positionsin the back seat where children canbe properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more thanthree children in your car:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

18

38

14

16

Protecting Children


If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Canadian Models

24

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger’s front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Children who play in cars canaccidentally get trapped inside thetrunk and be seriously injured orcould die. Teach your children notto play in or around cars. Knowhow to operate the emergencytrunk opener and decide if yourchildren should be shown how touse this feature (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the trunk, which canlead to accidental injury or death.

93

Protecting Children


If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not leave children alone in yourvehicle.

Lock both doors and the trunkwhen your car is not in use.

Keep car keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

25

The following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

To provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the boxes.

Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant’shead, neck, and back. See page

for additional information onprotecting infants.30

Protecting Children


General Guidelines for UsingChild Seats

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet safetystandards.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Infants:2.

1.

26

A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page foradditional information on protectingsmall children.

However, Honda is confident thatone or more child seat models can fitand be properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour car.

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific vehicleseating position (or positions) wherethey intend to use the seat. If apreviously purchased child seat doesnot fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

Your car has lower anchors installedfor use with LATCH (LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children) -compatible child seats. For moreinformation, see page .

34

43

CONTINUED

Small Children:

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

3.

Protecting Children


This page briefly summarizesHonda’s recommendations on whereto place rear-facing and forward-facing child seats in your car.

Never in the front seat, dueto the front airbag hazard.

The passenger’s front airbaginflates with enough force to killor seriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thevehicle seat is too far forward,or the child’s head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

Not recommended,due to the front airbag hazard. If asmall child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position and secure a front-facing child seat with the seat belt(see page ).

Recommended positions.Properly secure a rear-facing childseat (see pages and ).

Recommendedpositions. Properly secure a front-facing child seat (see pages and

).

35

35

31 43

43

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s SeatInfants:

Back Seats

Small children:

Infants:

Small children:

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

Protecting Children


After selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

When you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the car during acrash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and be seriously injured.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

All child seats aredesigned to be secured to the carwith the lap part of a lap/shoulderbelt. Some child seats can besecured to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system instead. A childwhose seat is not properly securedto the car can be endangered in acrash. See pages , and forinstructions on how to properlysecure child seats in this car.

However, a child seat does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or back-and-forth movement canbe expected and should not reducethe child seat’s effectiveness.

31 35 43

Installing a Child Seat

Storing a Child Seat

Secure the child in the child seat.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Properly secure the child seat tothe car.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children


Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back. Infants up to aboutone year of age must be restrained ina rear-facing child seat.

In this car, a rear-facing child seatcan be placed in any seating positionin the back seat, but not in the frontseat.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If the passenger’sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant. If an infant must be closelywatched, we recommend thatanother adult sit in the back seatwith the baby.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

We recommend that an infant berestrained in a rear-facing child seatuntil the infant is at least one yearold, reaches the seat maker’s weightor height limit, and is able to sit upwithout support.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Children


Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker’sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page ). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page ).

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat directlybehind the front passenger seat,move the front seat as far forward asneeded, and leave it unoccupied. Oryou may wish to get a smaller childseat that allows you to safely carry afront passenger.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

The following pages provideinstructions and tips on how tosecure a rear-facing child seat withthis type of seat belt.

If you have a child seat designed tobe attached to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

1.

14

15

43

CONTINUED

Protecting Children


Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation

31

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

2.

3.

4.

Protecting Children


Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby’sdoctor or follow the seat maker’srecommendations.

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

5.

Protecting Children


Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

33

A child at least one year old who cansit up without support, and who fitswithin the child seat maker’s weightand height limits, should berestrained in a forward-facing,upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

In this car, the best place to install aforward-facing child seat is in one ofthe seating positions in the back seat.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries. If asmall child must be closely watched,we recommend that another adult sitin the back seat with the child.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Protecting Children


The lap/shoulder belts in the backand front passenger seating positionshave a locking mechanism that mustbe activated to secure a child seat.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the car, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

If you have a child seat designed tobe attached to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

1.43

CONTINUED

Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children


Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

2.

3.

4.

Protecting Children


Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

5.

Protecting Children


When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat on abooster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.

We recommend that the child use abooster seat until the child is tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in the front seat.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childsit in the rear seat, all the way backagainst the seat, and put on the seatbelt. Follow the instructions on page

. Then check how the belt fits.16

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Children


Protecting Larger Children

38

Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possible,uses a booster seat if needed,and wears the seat belt properly.

CONTINUED

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

If a child needs a booster seat, werecommend choosing a high or low-back style that allows the child to bedirectly secured with the lap/shoulder belt.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child’s collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, andthe lap belt rests over the child’shipbones and touches the tops of thethighs as shown, the child isprobably big enough to wear the seatbelt.

However, if the shoulder belttouches or crosses the child’s neck,or if the lap belt crosses the child’sstomach, the child needs to use abooster seat.

This could result in serious neck andinternal injuries during a crash.

Protecting Children


Using a Booster SeatDo not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck or over the stomach.

39

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

In addition, the passenger’s frontairbag poses serious risks to children.If the seat is too far forward, or thechild’s head is thrown forwardduring a collision, or the child isunrestrained or out of position, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

A child should continue using abooster seat until the child exceedsthe booster seat manufacturer’srequirements.

Even then, the child may still need touse a booster seat. Note that somestates now require children to useboosters until they reach a certainage and/or weight. Be sure to checkcurrent laws in the state or stateswhere you intend to drive.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.


Protecting Children

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front

40

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.Carefully read the owner’s manual

and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Remind the child not to leantoward the door because of theside airbag.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:Physically, a child must be large

enough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

16 38

Protecting Children


Physical Size

Maturity

41

Your car has three tether anchoragepoints under the rear window forsecuring a tether-style child seat tothe car.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable. (Tethers are required inCanada.)

The tether anchorage points arelocated under plastic covers. Pivotthe cover backward to access theanchorage point.

To use either outside anchoragepoint, lift the rear head restraint,then route the tether strap over theseat-back between the legs of thehead restraint.

Using Child Seats with Tethers

Protecting Children


COVER

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

Your car is equipped with LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren) at the outer rear seats.The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Make sure there are no foreignobjects around the anchors.Foreign objects could get in theway of a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

The exact location of each loweranchor is marked with a small buttonabove the lower anchor point.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point as shown inthe illustration, then tighten thestrap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions. Make sure thestrap is not twisted.

Move the seat belt buckle orcenter seat belt away from thelower anchors.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Using LATCH

Protecting Children


LOWER ANCHORS

TETHER STRAP HOOK

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

Follow the child seat maker’sinstructions for any additionaladvice on adjusting or tighteningthe fit.

Put the child seat in the rear leftor right vehicle seat and attach thechild seat to the lower anchorsaccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions.

Lift the rear head restraint, thenroute the tether strap over theseat-back between the legs of thehead restraint.

3. 4. 5.

Protecting Children


Rigid type Flexible type

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point, andtighten the strap according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.Make sure the strap is not twisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers.

This symbol on rear or forwardfacing child seats or boostercushions indicates the presence ofLATCH compatible hardware.

6.

7.

Canadian models only

Protecting Children


Lower Universal Anchorage SystemSymbol

45

This seat belt has a single belt thatgoes over your shoulder, across yourchest and across your hips.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver’s seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver’sseat belt is fastened.

Guide the belt across your body tothe door pillar. After exiting the car,be sure the belt is out of the way andwill not get closed in the door.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all seating positionsexcept the driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages and for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

31 35

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts


See page for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions.The tensioners are independent ofthe airbag system, so they can beactivated during a collision that

might not cause the airbags todeploy. In this case, the airbagswould not be needed but theadditional seat belt tension can behelpful.

The tensioners will be activated in acollision severe enough to cause thefront airbags to inflate.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalway.

The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).

16

52



Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

47

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Honda will repair orreplace any seat belt component thatfails to function properly duringnormal use. Please see your

booklet fordetails.

Automatic seat belt tensioners thatdeployed during a crash must bereplaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

359

HondaWarranty Information



Seat Belt Maintenance

U.S. Models

48

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Your Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

Two front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

Emergency backup power in caseyour car’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

Your car is equipped with dual-stage,dual-threshold airbags to help reducethe chance of airbag-caused injuries.

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

5247

CONTINUED

SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work


Additional Information About Your Airbags

49

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags.



50

In a moderate to severe side impact,the sensors will detect rapiddeceleration and signal the controlunit to instantly inflate either thedriver’s or the passenger’s sideairbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.Some models are equipped with side

airbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe car as soon as it is safe to do so.

U.S. Owners:For additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled

that came with yourowner’s manual.

Canadian Owners:For additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled

SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags

SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.

Only on models equipped with sideairbags



How Your Side Airbags Work

51

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the car. If theimpact is on the passenger’s side, thepassenger’s side curtain airbag willinflate even if there are no occupantson that side of the car.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your front airbags. This lightwill also alert you to a potentialproblem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (page ).

Your car is equipped with sidecurtain airbags. These airbags arestored in the front, center, and rearpillars on both sides. The front andrear pillars on both sides are marked‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.’’

On models with side airbags, thislight will also alert you to a potentialproblem with your side airbags, thepassenger’s side airbag automaticcutoff system (see page ), or theside curtain airbags.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light briefly thengo out. This tells you that the systemis working properly.

53

47

Standard on U.S. EX-V6 model


How the SRS Indicator WorksHow Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork


SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

CONTINUED

If you see any of these indications,your airbags may not deploy, yourpassenger’s side airbag automaticcutoff system may not work properly,or your seat belt tensioners may notwork when you need them. See yourHonda dealer as soon as possible.

If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

This light alerts you thatthe passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your car has anautomatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

It does not mean there is a problemwith your side airbags. It means thatthe side airbag cutoff system hasactivated to prevent the side airbagfrom deploying.



How the Side Airbag CutoffIndicator Light Works


53

Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags, cutoffsystem, or tensioners do notwork properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the indicator should lightbriefly and go out (see page ). If itdoesn’t light, stays on, or comes onwhile driving without a passenger inthe front seat, have the systemchecked.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in the front, thissystem is designed to shut off theside airbag if a child leans sidewaysand the child’s head is in the sideairbag deployment path.

If a small-statured adult leanssideways, or larger adult slouchesand leans sideways into thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system may also shut off the sideairbag.

If the side airbag cutoff indicatorlight comes on, you should have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the deploymentpath of the side airbag, the systemwill turn the airbag back on and thelight will go out.

63



54

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

See page for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance-free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have your carserviced if:

Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit, automatic seat belttensioners, and other related parts.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by a Honda dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Take your car to anauthorized Honda dealer as soonas possible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.

233

Airbag Service Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto water.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting aHonda dealer.

Your airbags ever inflate.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.



55

Your car’s exhaust contains carbonmonoxide gas. You should have noproblem with carbon monoxideentering the car in normal driving ifyou maintain your car properly.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The car is raised for an oil change.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The car was in an accident thatmay have damaged the underside. High levels of carbon monoxide can

collect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thecar out of the garage.

With the trunk lid open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your car’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk lid open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem/climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked car,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

Select the Fresh Air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which is removed bythe owner), contact your Hondadealer for a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

On models without side airbags

On models with side airbags

On models with sidecurtain airbags

Safety Labels


HOOD

DASHBOARD

RADIATOR CAP

U.S. models

Canadian models

On cars with side curtain airbags

On cars with side airbagsU.S. models Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels


SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Honda. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 60...............................Indicator Lights . 61

.............................................Gauges . 68...............................Speedometer . 68

.................................Tachometer . 68.....................................Odometer . 69

Outside Temperature...................................Indicator . 69...................................Trip Meter . 70

...................Temperature Gauge . 70..................................Fuel Gauge . 70

Maintenance Required...................................Indicator . 71

Controls Near the Steering.......................................Wheel . 73

...................................Headlights . 74

Automatic Lighting Off.....................................Feature . 75

............Daytime Running Lights . 76....Instrument Panel Brightness . 76

................................Turn Signals . 77.....................Windshield Wipers . 77

..................Windshield Washers . 79..........................Hazard Warning . 79

.............Rear Window Defogger . 79......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 80

...............................Keys and Locks . 82..............................................Keys . 82

....................Immobilizer System . 83............................Ignition Switch . 84

......................Power Door Locks . 86...................Remote Transmitter . 87

...........................................Trunk . 91........Emergency Trunk Opener . 92

....................................Glove Box . 93............................Seat Adjustments . 94

.............Front Seat Adjustments . 94Driver’s Seat Manual Height

..............................Adjustment . 95Driver’s Seat Power Height

..............................Adjustment . 95

Driver’s Seat Power............................Adjustments . 96

...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 97........................Rear Seat Access . 98

..........................Head Restraints . 99.....................Folding Rear Seat . 100

..................................Seat Heaters . 102............................Power Windows . 103

.......................................Moonroof . 107...........................................Mirrors . 108

..Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 108...............................Parking Brake . 110

.................Console Compartment . 111..........................................Armrest . 111

.........................Beverage Holders . 112

.........................Center CD Pocket . 113...................................Coin Pocket . 113

........................................Sun Visor . 114................................Vanity Mirror . 115

......................................Coat Hook . 115........................Sunglasses Holder . 116

............Accessory Power Sockets . 116...............................Interior Lights . 117..............................Ceiling Light . 117

...................................Spotlights . 118........................Courtesy Lights . 119

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 59


Control Locations

60

MIRROR CONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

DIGITAL CLOCK

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

(P.122)CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

(P.129)

FUEL FILL DOOR/TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

(P.108)

(P.86)

(P.103)

(P.225, 91) (P.226)

(P.79)

(P.153, 171, 193)

(P.148, 163, 187)

HAZARD WARNINGLIGHTS

＊

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Indicator Lights


LOW FUEL INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT

MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFFINDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

DOOR AND TRUNKOPEN MONITOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATORPARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

(P.62, 379)

(P.62, 380)

(P.381)

(P.63)

(P.66)

(P.62)

(P.66)

(P.66, 213)

(P.63)

(P.63)

(P.65)

(P.71)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR(P.65)

(P.64)

(P.67)

(P.64)(P.64)

(P.67)

(P.67)

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your car. The engine can be severely damaged

if this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page .

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page .

See page .

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

379

380

381

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Seat Belt Reminder Light

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls62

This indicator lights briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch ON (II).If it comes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.

This indicator lights briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to ON(II). If it comes on at any other time,it indicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This light willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,side curtain airbags or automaticseat belt tensioners. For completeinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II). Itis a reminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

This light has two functions:

If the indicator remains lit afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page .

1.

2.

53

383

52


Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag CutoffIndicator

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Indicator Lights


U.S. Canada

This indicator has three functions:It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the TractionControl System.

It flashes when the TCS isregulating wheelspin.

If it comes on and stays on whenthe Traction Control System is on,it indicates that there is a problemin the TCS.

This indicator normally also comeson for a few seconds when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II). If thislight comes on and stays on at anyother time, or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II), there is a problem with theTCS. Take the car to your dealer tohave it checked. See page formore information on the TCS.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If it comeson and stays on with the TCSActivation Indicator, there is aproblem with the TCS. For moreinformation on the TCS, see page

.

This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II). If this lightcomes on at any other time, there isa problem in the ABS. If this happens,take the car to your dealer to have itchecked. With the light on, your carstill has normal braking ability but noanti-lock. For complete information,see page .

1.

2.

3.

258

258255

On all V6 models On all V6 models

TCS Activation Indicator Traction Control System(TCS) Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Indicator Lights


The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signaling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the car should flash.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

The appropriate light comes on inthis display if the trunk or eitherdoor is not closed tightly.

All the lights in the monitor displaycome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

83346

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Door and Trunk Open Monitor

Indicator Lights


This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0) without turning off thelight switch, this indicator willremain on. A reminder chime willalso sound when you open the driver’sdoor.

This indicator is located in the fuelgauge. It comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

This indicator lights when thesecurity system is set. See page

for complete information on thesecurity system.213

Lights On Indicator Low Fuel Indicator Security System Indicator

Indicator Lights



LOW FUEL INDICATOR

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) withthe headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when youturn on the Cruise Control Systemby pressing the Master Button. (seepage .)

This lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page for informationon operating the cruise control.

This light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page ).

76

214

214

306

74

Canadian models onlyCanadian models only

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Indicator Lights


The gauges illuminate when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

This shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

Gauges


Speedometer

Tachometer

68

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE

SELECT/RESETKNOB

MAINTENANCEREQUIREDINDICATOR

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

U.S. model is shown.

TRIP METER

ODOMETER/OUTSIDETEMPERATURE INDICATOR

The odometer and the outsidetemperature indicator use the samedisplay. To switch the displaybetween the odometer and theoutside temperature, press theSelect/Reset knob. When you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II), whatyou last selected is displayed.

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your car has been driven. Itmeasures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit in U.S.models, and in Centigrade inCanadian models. To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSelect/Reset knob until thetemperature is displayed.

The temperature sensor is located inthe front bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the road sur-face, engine heat, and the exhaustfrom surrounding traffic. This cancause an incorrect temperature read-ing when your speed is under19 mph (30 km/h).

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

On 4-cylinder EX model with leatherinterior and 6-cylinder EX model

Odometer Outside Temperature Indicator

Gauges


This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise into theupper half of the gauge. If it reachesthe red (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

This shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the car is onlevel ground. It may show slightlymore or less than the actual amountwhen you are driving on curvy orhilly roads.

The needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the odometer/outsidetemperature display by pressing theSelect/Reset knob repeatedly. Eachtrip meter works independently, soyou can keep track of two differentdistances.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), what you last selected isdisplayed.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Select/Resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

376

Trip Meter Temperature Gauge Fuel Gauge

Gauges


Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)and 10,000 miles (16,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your car in forscheduled maintenance per theNormal Conditions maintenanceschedule. The indicator light doesnot reflect severe maintenanceintervals.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulefor Normal Driving Conditions onpage (4-cylinder models) or page

(6-cylinder models).276

284

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models

CONTINUED

Maintenance Required Indicator

Gauges


MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourHonda dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

Hold the knob for approximatelyten seconds until the indicatorresets.

Press and hold the Select/Resetknob in the instrument panel, thenturn the ignition switch ON (II).

Turn off the engine.1.

2.

3.

Gauges


SELECT/RESET KNOB

＊

＊

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

To use the horn, press the padaround the ‘‘H’’ logo.

The controls under the left air ventare for the moonroof and theTraction Control System.

The steering wheel adjustment leveron the underside of the steeringcolumn allows you to tilt andtelescope the steering wheel.


Controls Near the Steering Wheel

73

CRUISECONTROLS

TILT/TELESCOPICADJUSTMENT

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

HORN

MOONROOFSWITCH

EX-V6 model without navigation system is shown.

(P.108)

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

(P.76)

(P.77, 79)

(P.79)

(P.79)

(P.214)(P.80)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

REMOTEAUDIOCONTROLS

(P.74/77)

(P.211)

TRACTION CONTROLSYSTEM ON/OFFSWITCH(P.259)

If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder chime when you open thedriver’s door.

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights, andrear license plate lights. Turning theswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the headlights.

To change from low beams to highbeams, push the turn signal leverforward until you hear a click. Theblue high beam indicator will light(see page ). To return to lowbeams, pull the turn signal leverback.

When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the Lights Onindicator comes on as a reminder.

67

Headlights



The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

The Automatic Lighting Off featureturns off the headlights, parkinglights, taillights and license platelights within 15 seconds of removingthe key from the ignition switch andclosing the driver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key,open, then close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter ten minutes.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off.

The high beams will stay on for aslong as you hold the lever back, nomatter what position the headlightswitch is in.

Automatic Lighting Off Feature



With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights and the highbeam indicator come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

The Select/Reset knob on theinstrument panel controls thebrightness of the instrument panellights. Turn the knob to adjust thebrightness.

The instrument panel will illuminatewith reduced brightness when youunlock and open the driver’s door.The brightness will increase slightlywhen you insert the key in theignition switch, then go to normal

brightness when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

If you do not insert the key in theignition switch after opening thedriver’s door, the illumination turnsoff in about 30 seconds after closingthat door.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to ON (II), theillumination turns off in about 10seconds.

To reduce glare at night, the instru-ment panel illumination dims whenyou turn the light switch to or

. Turning the Select/Resetknob fully to the right until you heara click will cancel the reduced bright-ness.

Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)



SELECT/RESET KNOB

Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

This lever controls the windshieldwipers and washers. It has fivepositions:

MIST: mistOFF: offINT: intermittentLO: low speedHI: high speed

To select a position, push the leverup or down.

CONTINUED

Turn Signals Windshield Wipers



TURN SIGNAL LEVER

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever up from theOFF position. The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.This gives you a quick way to clearthe windshield.

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. The sweepinterval will change slightly withspeed; getting shorter as you drivefaster. While the car is stopped andin gear, the wipers sweep thewindshield whenever you removeyour foot from the brake pedal. Inlow speed and high speed, the wipersrun continuously.

You can vary how often the wiperssweep the windshield by turning theINT TIME ring on the lever.

If you turn the INT TIME ring to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange from intermittent to lowspeed operation when vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).



To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed while you’repulling the lever, then complete onemore sweep of the windshield afteryou release it.

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both turn indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your car is disabled.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light above/inthe button lights to show thedefogger is on. It also shuts off whenyou turn off the ignition. You have toturn it on again when you restart thecar.

CONTINUED

Windshield Washers Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger



Manual A/C type shown

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

18

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

Steering Wheel Adjustment



Cars with navigation systemAuto A/C type shown

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thecar and be seriously injured in acrash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the car is stopped.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out to the desiredposition, making sure the wheelpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

To adjust the steering wheel:

Insert the key in the ignitionswitch, and unlock the steeringcolumn.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.



Your car comes with two masterkeys and a valet key.The master key fits all the locks onyour car:• Ignition• Driver’s door• Glove box• Trunk release handle• Rear seat trunk access

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Keepthe tag stored in a safe place. If youneed to replace a key, use onlyHonda-approved key blanks.

Your car also comes with two remotetransmitters built into the masterkeys; see page for an explanationof the remote transmitter operation.

The valet key works only in theignition and the driver’s door lock.You can keep the trunk releasehandle, rear seat trunk access, andglove box locked when you leaveyour car and the valet key at aparking facility.

87

Keys

Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks


MASTERKEY WITHREMOTETRANSMITTER

VALET KEY(LIGHT GREY)

KEYNUMBERTAG

The Immobilizer System protectsyour car from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The Immobilizer System indicatorwill also blink several times whenyou turn the ignition switch from ON(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour car undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourHonda dealer.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code:

Do not keep other immobilizerkeys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

Keep other keys away from yourcar’s key and the ignition switchwhile trying to start the engine.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Honda dealer.

CONTINUED

Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks


－ You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. If your car hasan automatic transmission, the shiftlever must also be in Park. The anti-theft lock will lock the steeringcolumn when you remove the key.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:• LOCK (0)• ACCESSORY (I)• ON (II)• START (III)

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

LOCK (0)Ignition Switch

Keys and Locks


－

－

－

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key’s coding (see page

).

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power sockets.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the car are usable.Several of the lights on the instru-ment panel come on as a test whenyou turn the ignition switch fromACCESSORY to ON.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

83

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Keys and Locks


Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

Each door has a master door lockswitch. Either switch locks andunlocks both doors. Push the top ofthe switch to lock both doors; pushthe bottom to unlock them.

Each door has a lock tab at the top ofthe door. When you push down thelock tab on the driver’s door, bothdoors lock. Pulling up the lock tab onthe driver’s door only unlocks thatdoor. The lock tab on the passenger’sdoor only locks and unlocks thatdoor.

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the car, push the locktab down and close the door. To lockthe driver’s door, remove the keyfrom the ignition switch and pushthe lock tab down or push the top ofthe master switch, then close thedoor.

Both doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in thedriver’s door. To unlock just thedriver’s door, turn the key andrelease it. If you turn the key again,both doors will unlock.

You can open or close the windowsby using the key in the driver’s door(see page ).106

Power Door Locks

Keys and Locks


MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH LOCK TAB

If you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, Lockout Preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver’sdoor. With the driver’s door openand the key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. However, if the driver’sdoor is not open, the master doorlock switches are not disabled.Pushing the top of the switch on theopen passenger’s door will lock bothdoors. If you try to lock an opendriver’s door by pushing down thelock tab, the tabs on both doors popup. Pushing down the lock tab on thepassenger’s door only locks that door.

You can lock and unlock your carwith the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, bothdoors lock. The parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights and lights onindicator flash once.

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds afteryou have locked the doors, you willhear a beep to verify that the doorsare locked and (if equipped) that thesecurity system has set.

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver’s door unlocks.The passenger’s door unlocks whenyou push the button a second time.The parking lights, side markerlights, taillights and lights onindicator flash twice each time youpush the button.

You can also open both powerwindows from outside the car withthe remote transmitter (see page

).106

CONTINUED

Lockout Prevention Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks


UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LED

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) andthe spotlights (if the switch is in theDoor position) will come on whenyou press the UNLOCK button. Ifyou do not open either door, thelights stay on for about 30 seconds,then fade out. If you relock the doorswith the remote transmitter before30 seconds have elapsed, the lightswill go off immediately.

You cannot lock the doors with theremote transmitter if either door isnot fully closed or the key is in theignition switch. You cannot unlockthe doors with the key in the ignitionswitch.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openeither door within 30 seconds, thedoors automatically relock and thesecurity system sets (except for4-cylinder LX model).

To open the trunk, push the TrunkRelease button for approximatelyone second.

The trunk will not open if the key isin the ignition switch.

Panic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your car’s horn and exteriorlights to attract attention. The hornsounds and the exterior lights flashfor about 30 seconds. To activatepanic mode, press and hold thePANIC button for about two seconds.

To cancel Panic mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Panic mode will not activate if theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

Panic Mode

Keys and Locks


When the remote transmitter’sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors, and theLED will not light. Replace thebattery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Replacing the Battery

Keys and Locks


SCREW

BATTERY

TAB

＋

Avoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your car’s system byyour Honda dealer. Any othertransmitters you have will also needto be reprogrammed.

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.

Install the parts in reverse order.

4.

5.




Transmitter Care

Keys and Locks


You can open the trunk in two ways:

Pull the trunk release handle tothe left of the driver’s seat.

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Lock the trunk release handlewith the master key.

Give the person the valet key.

1.

2.

56

234

Trunk

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Keys and Locks


Pull

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLEMASTERKEY

As a safety feature, your car has arelease lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.

To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

For more information about childsafety, see page .25

Emergency Trunk Opener

Keys and Locks


Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush. Lock or unlock the glove boxwith the master key.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.

Glove Box

Keys and Locks


GLOVE BOX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

－

To change the angle of the seat-back,pull up on the lever on the outside ofthe seat bottom. Move the seat-backto the desired position and releasethe lever. Let the seat-back latch intothe new position.

All V6 models, and the 4-cylinder EXmodel with leather interior have apower adjustable driver’s seat.

The 4-cylinder EX model withoutleather interior has a power seatbottom height adjustment. All otherdriver’s seat adjustments in thismodel are manual.

The front passenger’s seat in allmodels adjusts manually.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

The 4-cylinder LX model has manualdriver’s seat adjustments (see nextcolumn).

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

14 15Front Seat Adjustments

Seat Adjustments


The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat bottom,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push down the leverrepeatedly.


The height of your driver’s seat ispower adjustable. Pull up on theswitch to raise the seat. Push it downto lower the seat.


Make sure to pull the lever upwardor downward to its full range.

On 4-cylinder LX model On 4-cylinder EX model without leatherinterior

Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

Driver’s Seat Power HeightAdjustment

Seat Adjustments


－

Pull up or push down on the front ofthe switch to move the seat bottom’sfront edge up or down. Pull up orpush down on the rear of the switchto move the rear of the seat bottomup or down.

Push the horizontal switch forwardor backward to move the seatforward or backward.

The two power seat adjustmentswitches are on the outside edge ofthe seat bottom. The horizontalswitch adjusts the seat bottom inseveral directions. The short verticalswitch adjusts the seat-back angle.

You can adjust the seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

On all V6 models, and the 4-cylinderEX model with leather interior

1514

Driver’s Seat Power Adjustments

Seat Adjustments


Pull the center of the horizontalswitch up to raise the seat. Push itdown to lower the seat.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the rear switch in thedirection you want to move. Vary the lumbar support by moving

the lever on the right side of theseat-back. Move the lever forward toincrease support and backward todecrease it.

On all EX and EX-V6 models

Driver’s Lumbar Support

Seat Adjustments


To get into the rear seat on thedriver’s side, open the door and pullthe release lever up on the side ofthe seat-back. The seat-back will tiltforward to allow easier entry to therear seat.

To get into the rear seat on thedriver’s side, open the door and pullup on the seat-back adjustment lever.The seat-back will tilt forward toallow easier entry to the rear seat.

To get into the rear seat on thepassenger’s side, push downward onthe release lever at the base of theseat-back. The seat-back will tiltforward and the entire seat will moveforward to allow easier entry to therear seat.

On all V6 models and the 4-cylinder EXmodel with leather interior

On LX and EX models

Rear Seat AccessDriver’s Side Passenger’s Side

Seat Adjustments


SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVERRELEASE LEVER RELEASE LEVER

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

16

Your car has adjustable headrestraints on the front seats. Theyare also on the outside positions ofthe rear seat.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries. They are mosteffective when you adjust them sothe back of the occupant’s head restsagainst the center of the restraint. Ataller person should adjust therestraint as high as possible.

After a passenger gets into the backseat, push the seat-back to theupright position and push the wholeseat backwards until it latches. Makesure the seat is fully latched beforesitting in it.

CONTINUED

Head Restraints

Seat Adjustments


RELEASE BUTTON

FRONT

To fold down either side of the seat-back from inside the car, insert themaster key in the lock on the rearshelf. To fold down the driver’s side,turn the key clockwise, pull down thetop of the seat-back, then release thekey. To fold down the passenger’sside, turn the key counterclockwiseand perform the same procedure.

The back of the rear seat folds downto give you direct access to the trunk.Each side folds down separately.With only half the seat folded, youcan still carry a passenger in theback seat. The seat-back can bereleased from inside the car or insidethe trunk.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release buttonand pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

Folding Rear Seat

Seat Adjustments


REAR

MASTER KEY

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release under thetrunk panel. Push the seat-backdown, then let go of the release.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back whenever the seat-back is in itsupright position.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .56

234Carrying Cargo

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Seat Adjustments


GUIDE

Pull

CENTERSHOULDER BELT

The HI or LO indicator lights andremains lit until you turn it off bypushing the opposite side of theswitch lightly. The indicator will turnoff.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops. Itcontinues to cycle as long as youleave it set on HI. The HI indicatorremains lit as a reminder that youhave the heater on.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Do not use the seat heaters, evenon the LO setting, if the engine isleft idling for an extended period.They can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly. Select the LOsetting when the seats feel warm.The HI setting draws largeamounts of current from thebattery.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. Because of the sensorsfor the side airbag system, there isno heater in the passenger’s seat-back. The ignition switch must beON (II) to use the heaters. Push thefront of the switch, HI, to rapidlyheat up the seat. After the seatreaches a comfortable temperature,select LO by pushing the back of theswitch. This will keep the seat warm.

On EX-V6 model and EX model withleather interior

Seat Heaters


SEATHEATERSWITCH

Your car’s windows are electrically-powered. Turn the ignition switch toON (II) to raise or lower eitherwindow.

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pulling back on theswitch and holding it.

The driver’s armrest has a masterpower window control panel. Toopen the passenger’s window, pushdown on the switch and hold it downuntil the window reaches the desiredposition. To close the window, pullback on the window switch. Releasethe switch when the window gets tothe position you want.

CONTINUED


Power Windows

103

MAIN SWITCHDRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

－

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down, then release it.The window automatically goesdown all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

If the driver’s window runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passenger’s window. When youpush in the MAIN switch, thepassenger’s window cannot be raisedor lowered. The MAIN switch doesnot affect the driver’s window. Tocancel this feature, push on theswitch again to get it to pop out.Keep the MAIN switch off when youhave children in the car so they donot injure themselves by operatingthe window unintentionally.

AUTO

Auto Reverse

Power Windows


If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the driver’s windowfuse is removed, the AUTO functionwill be disabled. The power windowsystem needs to be reset afterreconnecting the battery or installingthe fuse. You should do the following.

Start the engine. Push down onthe driver’s window switch untilthe window is fully open.

Pull back on the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourcar checked by a Honda dealer.

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to ten minutesafter you turn off the ignition.Opening either door cancels thedelay function. You must turn theignition switch ON (II) again beforeyou can raise or lower the windows.

1.

2.

Power Windows


You can open both windows from theoutside with the remote transmitter.

You cannot close the windows withthe remote transmitter.

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. Both windows start to open.To stop the windows, release thekey.

You can open and close the windowswith the key in the driver’s door lock.

To open:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

To open the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

NOTE: If the window stops beforethe desired position, repeat steps 2and 3.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s door unlocks, andboth windows start to open. Tostop the windows, release thebutton.

To open the windows further,press the button again.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Opening the Windows with theRemote Transmitter

Opening/Closing the Windowswith the Key

Power Windows


UNLOCK BUTTON

Close

Open

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the upper part of theswitch ( ). To open themoonroof, press and hold the lowerpart of the switch ( ). Releasethe switch when the moonroof getsto the desired position. Make sureeveryone’s hands are away from themoonroof before opening or closingit.

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe ON (II).

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. Both windowsstart to close. To stop the windows,release the key.

To close the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

NOTE: If the window stops beforethe desired position, repeat steps 2and 3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED


Power Windows, Moonroof


Moonroof

107

MOONROOF SWITCH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

Adjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment knob on the driver’s doorarmrest:

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Turn the adjustment knob to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to ten minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. The key-offdelay cancels as soon as you openeither door. You must then turn theignition ON (II) for the moonroof tooperate.

1.

2.


Mirrors

Moonroof, Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

108

TAB

ADJUSTMENT KNOB

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

Push or pull the adjustment knobin the appropriate direction tomove the mirror right, left, up, ordown.

When you finish, turn theadjustment knob to the center(off) position. This turns off theadjustment knob so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the knob.

The outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionswitch ON (II), turn on the heatersby pressing the button. The light inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

3.

4.

On all Canadian models

Mirrors


HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

ADJUSTMENT KNOB

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased with the engine running(see page ).63


Parking Brake

110

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Driving the car with the parking brakeapplied can damage the rear brakesand axles.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the right lever and lift thearmrest.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theleft lever and lift up the armrest.

To use the console lid as an armrest,slide it to the desired position.

To close, lower the armrest and pushit down until it latches. The tray in the console compartment

has a coin holder.

Make sure the passenger’s hands orfingers are away from the armrestbefore moving it.

Console Compartment Armrest

Console Compartment, Armrest


CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

RIGHT LEVER LEFT LEVER

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you open or close thedoors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets.

Spilled liquids can also damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the side panel.

Beverage Holders


DOOR

To open the coin pocket, pull the lidup.To close it, push the lid down until itlatches.The compartment cannot be used asan ashtray.

To open the center CD pocket, push-down on the center of the lid tounlatch it. It will swing openautomatically.To close it, push the lid down until itlatches.This pocket can store up to 12 CDs.

On cars without navigation system

Center CD Pocket Coin Pocket

Center CD Pocket, Coin Pocket


Push

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window.

In this position, the sun visor can beadjusted by moving it on its slider.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the car.

In this position, the sun visor can beextended by sliding out theextension. Do not use the sun visorextension over the rear view mirror.

Do not use the sun visor over therear view mirror.

On cars without side curtain airbags



Sun Visor

114

EXTENSION

SUN VISOR

To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

The lights beside the mirror comeon when you pull up the cover.

Make sure the coat hook is closedwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

To use a coat hook, pull it down.Close it with a firm push.



Vanity Mirror Coat Hook

Vanity Mirror, Coat Hook

115

COAT HOOK

Do not put a coat hanger orhard objects on a coat hook.This could result in injuries ifyour side curtain airbag inflates.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. It will unlatch andswing down. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.

Your car has two accessory powersockets, one is located in the front ofthe center console, and the other isin the center console compartment.To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

To open the socket, pull the cover up.

Sunglasses Holder Accessory Power Sockets

Sunglasses Holder, Accessory Power Sockets


ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

COVER

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

They will not power an automotivetype cigarette lighter element.

When both sockets are being used,the combined power rating of bothaccessories should be 120 watts orless (10 amps).

After both doors are closed tightly,the light dims slightly, then fades outin about 30 seconds. In the ONposition, the ceiling light stays oncontinuously.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) also comes onwhen you unlock the door with theremote transmitter (see page ).The light fades out after both doorsare closed.

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch. In the OFF position, the lightdoes not come on. In the centerposition, the ceiling light comes onwhen you open either door.

88

CONTINUED

Accessory Power Sockets, Interior Lights


Ceiling Light

117

OOFFFF

OONN

DOOR ACTIVATED

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) comes on whenyou remove the key from the ignitionswitch. If you do not open a door, thelight stays on, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

If you leave either door open withthe key not in the ignition switch, theceiling light will go off after threeminutes.

Turn on a spotlight by pushing thelens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can use the spotlights at alltimes.

Spotlights

Interior Lights


LX and LX-V6 models EX and EX-V6 models

The courtesy light in each doorcomes on when the door is opened,and goes out when the door is closed.

Your car also has a courtesy light inthe ignition switch. This light comeson when you open the driver’s door.It fades out in about 30 seconds afterthe door is closed.

The spotlights (with the switch inthe DOOR position) also come onwhen you unlock the door with theremote transmitter, and when youremove the key from the ignitionswitch.(See Ceiling Light on page

.)

The spotlights have a two-positionswitch. In the DOOR position, thelights come on when you open eitherdoor. In the OFF position, the lightsdo not come on.

117

CONTINUED

On EX and EX-V6 models

Interior Lights


Courtesy Lights

119

IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT

DOOR LIGHT

OFF

DOORACTIVATED

The courtesy light between thespotlights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the Select/Resetknob on the instrument panel.


Interior Lights


COURTESY LIGHT

.....................Heating and Cooling . 122.........What Each Control Does . 122

............How to Use the System . 125..........To Turn Everything Off . 128

...............Climate Control System . 129

.......Fully-automatic Operation . 131

.......Semi-automatic Operation . 132......Dual Temperature Control . 137

.......Fully-automatic Operation . 138

.......Semi-automatic Operation . 139......Dual Temperature Control . 145

Sunlight Sensor/............Temperature Sensor . 147

.......................Audio System (LX) . 148....AM/FM/CD Audio System . 148

.................Operating the Radio . 148

.................Adjusting the Sound . 152..............................Digital Clock . 153

.........Operating the CD Player . 154.....Operating the CD Changer . 156....CD Player Error Indications . 158

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 159

Operating the Cassette....................................Player . 160

...........Tape Search Functions . 161Audio System

..............(EX, EX-V6, LX-V6) . 163

AM/FM/CD Changer Audio....................................System . 163

.................Operating the Radio . 164

.................Adjusting the Sound . 169..............................Digital Clock . 171

.....Operating the CD Changer . 173CD Changer Error

.............................Indications . 182Operating the Cassette

....................................Player . 183...........Tape Search Functions . 185

Audio System(U.S. 4-cylinder EX with

leather interior, U.S.............................EX-V6) . 187

AM/FM/CD Changer Audio....................................System . 187

.................Operating the Radio . 188................Adjusting the Sound . 191

.............................Digital Clock . 193...................Radio Frequencies . 194

.......................Radio Reception . 194.....Operating the CD Changer . 196

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 204

......Protecting Compact Discs . 205Operating the Cassette

....................................Player . 206...........Tape Search Functions . 208

Caring for the Cassette....................................Player . 210

...........Remote Audio Controls . 211.......................Theft Protection . 212

............................Security System . 213...............................Cruise Control . 214

Homelink Wireless Control........................................System . 218

Without Navigation System

With Navigation System

Without Navigation System


Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features 121

Proper use of the Heating andCooling system can make theinterior dry and comfortable, andkeep the windows clear for the bestvisibility.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe fan’s speed, which increases airflow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the air flow.

This button turns the air condi-tioning ON and OFF. The indicatorabove the button lights when theA/C is on.

This button controls the source of airgoing into the system. When theindicator above this button is lit, airfrom the car’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).79

On LX, EX and LX-V6 models


Heating and Cooling

What Each Control Does

Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dial

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger Button

122

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

FAN CONTROL DIAL RECIRCULATION BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) BUTTON

MODE BUTTONS

Use the MODE buttons to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches toRecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to Fresh Airmode.

Air flow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield,and the corner vents in thedashboard. When you select

or , the systemautomatically switches to Fresh Airmode.In these two modes, the A/C stayson with the indicator off.

Heating and Cooling


Mode Buttons

123

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

The vents in the corners of thedashboard can be opened and closedwith the dials underneath them.

To adjust the air flow from each vent,move the tab in the center of eachvent up-and-down and side-to-side.

Heating and Cooling


Vent Controls

124

CENTER VENTSTABS

Close Open

TAB

Open

PASSENGER’S SIDE VENTDRIVER’S SIDE VENT

Close

TAB

CONTINUED

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

Turn the temperature control dialall the way to the left.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keepthese clear of leaves and otherdebris.

This section covers how to set up thesystem controls for ventilation,heating, cooling, dehumidifying, anddefrosting.

The engine must be running for theheater and air conditioning togenerate hot and cold air. The heateruses engine coolant to warm the air.If the engine is cold, it will be severalminutes before you feel warm aircoming from the system.

It is best to leave the system in FreshAir mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in Recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to Recirculation mode whenyou are driving through smoky ordusty conditions, then switch back toFresh Air mode when the conditionclears.

The air conditioning does not rely onengine temperature.

1.

2.3.

Heating and Cooling


Ventilation

How to Use the System

125

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIALFAN CONTROL

DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) BUTTON MODE BUTTONS

Turn on the A/C by pressing theA/C button. The light above thebutton comes on when a fan speedis selected.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is all the way to the left.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

If the interior is very warm frombeing parked in the sun, you can coolit down more rapidly by setting upthe controls this way:

Start the engine.Turn on the A/C by pressing theA/C button. Make sure the tem-perature control dial is turned allthe way to the left.Set the fan to maximum speed.Open the windows partially. Select

and Fresh Air mode.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:

Set the fan to the desired speed.Select the MAX A/C mode.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects andswitches to Recirculation mode.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is all the way to the left.

When the interior has cooled downto a more comfortable temperature,close the windows and set thecontrols as described for normalcooling.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

1.2.

3.4.

1.2.

3.


Heating and Cooling

To Cool with A/C

126

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) BUTTON

FAN CONTROLDIAL

MODE BUTTONS

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial so the mixture of heated andcooled air feels comfortable.

Once the engine is warmed up, thissetting is suitable for all drivingconditions.

Set the fan to the desired speed.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C. (The indicator above theA/C button stays off.)Adjust the temperature controldial so the air flow from thedefroster vents feels warm.Turn on the rear window defoggerto help clear the rear window.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C turns off.But if it was on to start with, itstays on.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

) when driving in stop-and-gotraffic or climbing a long, steep hill.If it moves near the red zone, turnoff the A/C until the gauge readsnormally.

To warm the interior:

Start the engine.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

4.

1.2.

3.4.

70

CONTINUED

Heating and Cooling


To Heat and Dehumidify with AirConditioning

To Defog and Defrost

To Heat

127

For safety, make sure you have aclear view through all the windowsbefore driving away.

To shut off the system temporarily,turn the fan speed and temperaturecontrol dials all the way to the left.

These settings direct all the air flowto the defroster vents at the base ofthe windshield and the side windowdefroster vents. The air flow will getwarmer and clear the windows fasteras the engine warms up. You canclose the side vents with the dialunderneath each vent. This will sendmore warm air to the windshielddefroster vents.

To remove exterior frost or ice fromthe windshield and side windowsafter the car has been sitting out incold weather:

Start the engine.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C. (The indicator above theA/C button stays off.)Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum.

To rapidly remove exterior frost orice from the windshield (on very colddays), first select the Recirculationmode. Once the windshield is clear,select the Fresh Air mode to avoidfogging the windows.

No air flow can cause the windows tofog up. It is recommended that youkeep the fan on at all times so staleair and moisture do not build up inthe interior and cause fogging.

1.2.

3.

Heating and Cooling


To Turn Everything Off

128

CONTINUED

The side vents can be opened andclosed with the dials underneaththem.

The automatic climate controlsystem in your Honda picks theproper combination of airconditioning, heating, and ventilationto maintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and air flow levels.

You can adjust the temperatures ofthe driver’s side and the passenger’sside independently (see pages

and ). To adjust the air flow from each vent,move the tab in the center of eachvent up-and-down and side-to-side.The direction of air flow from the

vents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

137 145

On 4-cylinder EX model with leatherinterior and EX-V6 model only

Climate Control System


CENTER VENTSTABTABS

Close

DRIVER’S SIDE VENT

Open

The climate control system draws airthrough the exterior vents at thebottom of the windshield. Keepthese vents clear of leaves and otherdebris.

For the climate control system toprovide heating and cooling, theengine must be running.


Comfort and Convenience Features130

PASSENGER’S SIDE VENT

Open Close

TAB

To put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button, then set thedesired temperature by turning thedriver’s temperature control dial.You will see AUTO in the system’sdisplay.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

CONTINUED



Fully-automatic OperationWithout Navigation System

131

RECIRCULATION BUTTONOFF BUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

AUTO BUTTON

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remain auto-matically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

This button controls the source of airgoing into the system. When theindicator in this button is lit, air fromthe car’s interior is sent through thesystem again (Recirculation mode).When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-tem cannot regulate the inside tem-perature if you set the dial below theoutside temperature. With the A/Coff, use the temperature control dialto adjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ‘‘ ’’ or its upperlimit ‘‘ ’’, the system runs atfull cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until the carhas been driven for a short time andthe heater starts to develop warm air.

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. No air flow can cause thewindows to fog up. It isrecommended that you keep the fanon at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.



Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button

132

▲▼

CONTINUED

You can manually select the fanspeed by pressing the fan controlbuttons: to increase the fan’sspeed, or to decrease the fan’sspeed.

Press the DUAL button to select thedual temperature control mode (seepage ).

Use the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes; you can turn it offwith the dial below each vent. Eachtime you press the MODE button,the display shows the mode selected.Press the button four times to see allthe modes.

137



Fan Control Buttons

Mode Button

Dual Button

133

FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

RECIRCULATION BUTTONDUAL BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.



CONTINUED

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.



The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease air flow to the windshield byclosing the side vents in thedashboard.


Rear Window Defogger Button



REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

Your car is equipped with twotemperature control dials, one forthe driver, and one for the passenger.The driver’s side and the passenger’sside can be controlled independentlyby adjusting these dials when thegreen indicator in the DUAL buttonis lit.

Push the fan, the A/C, the AUTO, orthe button, and the settemperatures appear in the display.When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, you can adjust bothsides to the same temperature byturning the driver’s control dial.

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s, press the DUAL button,then turn the driver’s control dial. Toset the passenger’s side to adifferent value than the driver’s side,turn the passenger’s control dial (seepage ). You can adjust thepassenger’s side without pressingthe DUAL button first.

131

Dual Temperature Control



Temperature Control Dials

137

PASSENGER’S SIDEDRIVER’S SIDE

▲

▼

To put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button. Theindicator in the button will light.Then set the desired temperature bypressing the temperature buttons:to raise the temperature above thedisplayed value, or to lower thetemperature.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.




Fully-automatic Operation

138

AUTO BUTTON

OFF BUTTON RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Some ofthese functions appear in theNavigation System display. Press theA/C button next to the display toshow these functions. Making anymanual selection causes theindicator in the AUTO button to goout.

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. No air flow can cause thewindows to fog up. It isrecommended that you keep the fanon at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ‘‘ ’’ or its upperlimit ‘‘ ’’, the system runs atfull cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until the carhas been driven for a short time andthe heater starts to develop warm air.

CONTINUED



Semi-automatic Operation

139

Touching ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ in thedisplay turns the air conditioning onand off. You will see A/C ON or A/COFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-tem cannot regulate the inside tem-perature if you set it below the out-side temperature. With the A/C off,use the temperature control buttonsto adjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.



Air Conditioning (A/C) Icons

140

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) ICONS

MODE ICONS

FAN CONTROLICONS

A/C BUTTON

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

Use the MODE icons in the displayto select the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard corner vents and the sidevents in all modes.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

CONTINUED



Mode Icons

141

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.



You can manually select the fanspeed by touching any of the fancontrol icons on the display.

This button controls the source of airgoing into the system. When theindicator in this button is lit, air fromthe car’s interior is sent through thesystem again (Recirculation mode).When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

Press the DUAL button to select thedual temperature control mode (seepage ).145

CONTINUED

Fan Control Icons

Recirculation Button

Dual Button



RECIRCULATION BUTTONDUAL BUTTON

The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease air flow to the windshield byclosing the side vents in thedashboard.


Rear Window Defogger Button





REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTONDUAL BUTTON

▲ ▼

Your car has four temperaturecontrol buttons on the climatecontrol panel, two for the driver andtwo for the passenger. The driver’sand passenger’s sides can becontrolled independently by pushingthese buttons when the greenindicator in the DUAL button is lit.

Push AUTO or and the settemperatures appear in the display.When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, you can adjust bothsides to the same temperature bypressing the or buttons on thedriver’s side.

CONTINUED

Dual Temperature Control

Temperature Control Buttons



DUAL BUTTON



▲ ▼

▲ ▼

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s, press the DUAL button,then press the or buttons onthe driver’s side. To set thepassenger’s side to a different valuethan the driver’s, press the orbuttons on the passenger’s side. Youcan adjust the passenger’s sidewithout pressing the DUAL buttonfirst.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit or its upper limit, it will bedisplayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.



DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is locatedin the top of the dashboard and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.



Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor

147

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset bars allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM button.Adjust the volume by turning thesame knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

LX modelAM/FM/CD Audio System

Operating the Radio

Audio System


STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE BARSEEK BAR

AM/FMBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

PRESETBARS

PWR/VOLKNOB

－－

－

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressthe SEEK bar on either the or

, then release it. Depending onwhich side you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency. The frequency numberswill start to change rapidly. Releasethe bar when the display reaches thedesired frequency. To change thefrequency in small increments, pressand release the TUNE bar quickly.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset bars.

CONTINUED

SCANSEEK

TUNE

Audio System


－

－

－

To store a frequency:

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the three preset bars.Each side of the bars (1 6) willstore one frequency on the AM band,and two frequencies on the FM band.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbar.

Pick the preset number (1 6)you want for that station. Pressthe left or right side of the bar andhold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Preset

Audio System


A.SEL INDICATOR

SCANBUTTON

PRESETBARS

TUNEBAR

A.SELBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

PWR/VOLKNOB

－

－

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the preset bars.Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset bars as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you set previously.When you return home, turn offAuto Select by pressing the A. SELbutton. The preset bars will thenselect the frequencies you originallyset.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset bars (1 6).You can then use the preset bars toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press the left orright side of any preset bar that doesnot have a station stored.

For information, see page .

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the left orright side of the proper preset bar totune to it.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

194

Audio System


AUTO SELECT

Radio Frequencies and Reception

151

－

－

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe SOUND button. The modechanges from BAS to TRE to FAD toBAL, and then back to the selectedaudio mode, each time you press theSOUND button. Each mode is shownin the display as it changes.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theSOUND button. Adjust the Balanceor Fader to your liking by turningthe VOLUME knob.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the SOUNDbutton. Adjust the desired mode byturning the VOLUME knob.

The level gauge on the display alsoshows you the range.

The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theVOLUME knob.

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass


Audio System

152

VOLUME KNOB

SOUND BUTTON

Adjustment Level LEVEL GAUGE

For example:1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the time setting will belost. To set the time again, follow thesetting procedure.

The audio system usually shows thetime when the ignition switch is inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

To set the time, press the Clock Setbutton (SOUND) until you hear abeep. The displayed time begins toblink.

Press and hold the H (Preset 4) sideof the bar until the hour advances tothe desired time.

Press and hold the M (Preset 5) sideof the bar until the minutes advanceto the desired time.

Press the Clock Set button(SOUND) again to enter the set time.

You can use the R (Preset 6) side ofthe bar to quickly set the time to thenearest hour. Press the Clock Setbutton (SOUND) until you hear abeep, then press the R (Preset 6)side of the bar. If the displayed timeis before the half hour, pressing Rsets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, pressing R sets theclock forward to the beginning of thenext hour.

Digital Clock

Audio System


DIGITAL CLOCK

PRESET BARS

CLOCK SETBUTTON

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems. You can alsoplay 3-inch (8-cm) discs withoutusing an adapter ring. Avoid usingCDs that have adhesive-type labels.The edges can curl up and cause theCD to jam in the drive.

Examine the CD for any labels orother contamination on it that couldcause it to jam in the drive. With theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or ON (II), insert the disc into theCD slot. Push the disc in halfway;the drive will pull it in the rest of theway and begin to play. The numberof the track that is playing is shownin the display.

Audio System


Operating the CD Player

154

CD/AUXBUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

EJECTBUTTON

RDMBUTTON

CD SLOT

PWR/VOLKNOB

RPTBUTTON

－

CONTINUED

This feature, whenactivated, samples all the tracks onthe selected disc in the order theyare recorded on the CD. To activatethe Scan feature, select the Scanmode by pressing the SCAN button.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will then play the firsttrack for approximately ten seconds.If you do nothing, the system willthen play the following tracks for tenseconds each. When it plays a trackthat you want to continue listening to,press the SCAN button again.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar,

the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side to skip

backward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.If you eject the disc, but do not

remove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Pressthe side to move forward. Pressthe side to move backward.Release the bar when the systemreaches the point you want.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play the disc again.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM/FM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.


Audio System

SCAN

155

－

－

－＋

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.


This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressand release the RDM button. Youwill see RDM in the display. Thesystem will then select and playtracks randomly. This continuesuntil you deactivate Random Play bypressing RDM again.

To select a different disc, use thePreset 5 (DISC ) side or Preset 6(DISC ) side of the preset bar.Press the Preset 6 side to select thenext disc in the magazine. Press thePreset 5 side of the bar to select theprevious disc. If you select an emptyslot in the magazine, the changer will,after finding that slot empty, try toload the CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your car. It holds up to six oreight discs, providing several hoursof continuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Audio System


REPEAT Operating the CD Changer(Optional)

RANDOM PLAY

156

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

If you eject the disc in the in-dashCD while it is playing, the systemwill automatically switch to the CDchanger and begin play where it leftoff. If there are no CDs in thechanger, the display will flash. Youwill have to select another mode(AM or FM) with the button.

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.205

Audio System


Protecting Compact Discs

157

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Honda dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

CD Player Error Indications

Audio System


Indication SolutionCauseIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the optionalCD changer, find the cause in thechart to the right. If you cannot clearthe error indication, take the car toyour Honda dealer.

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine. Check for an error indication.Insert the magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Insert CD.

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine. Check for an error indication.Insert the magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDMagazine

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

No CD magazine in theCD Changer

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System


＊

＊

The cassette system features Dolbynoise reduction, automatic sensing ofchromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, andauto-reverse for continuous play.

To operate the cassette player, theignition switch must be inACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Makesure the tape opening on the cassetteis facing to the right, then insert thecassette most of the way into the slot.The system will pull it in the rest ofthe way, and begin to play.

2

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Operating the Cassette Player(Optional)

Audio System


CD/AUXBUTTON

RPTBUTTON

NOISEREDUCTIONINDICATOR

PRESET BARS

SEEK/SKIP BAR PWR/VOL KNOB

AM/FM BUTTON TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

RPT INDICATOR

▲

－

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the Preset 3(PLAY/PROG) side of the presetbar.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. The indi-cator will light in the display. If thetape was not recorded with Dolbynoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the Preset 4 (NR) side ofthe preset bar.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the bar again.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the cassette player will be inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) side ofthe preset bar.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM, or CD/AUX button. Tochange back to the cassette player,push the CD/AUX button.

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the Preset 1(REW) side of the preset bar. Youwill see REW in the display. To fastforward the tape, push the Preset 2(FF) side of the preset bar. You willsee FF displayed. Press the Preset 1,2, or 3 side of the bars to take the sys-tem out of rewind or fast forward.When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it reverses direction andbegins to play.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the eject buttonon the cassette player. CONTINUED

Audio System


Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

161

－－Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

The Skip function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To activate SKIP, pressthe SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the

side to advance to thebeginning of the next song orpassage, or the side to return tothe beginning of the current song orpassage. FF or REW will flash in thedisplay as the tape moves. When thesystem reaches the beginning of thenext song or passage (FF), or thebeginning of the current one (REW),it goes back to PLAY mode.

210

Caring for the Cassette PlayerREPEATSKIP

Audio System


The in-dash CD changer holds up tosix discs. You operate the CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. See page for CDchanger operation.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thecar’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset bars allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

173

212

For LX-V6, EX and EX-V6 withoutNavigation System

AM/FM/CD ChangerAudio System

Audio System


AM/FM BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE BAR

PRESETBARS

SEEK BAR

PWR/VOL KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

EX with leather interior and EX-V6

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

Audio System


Operating the Radio

164

AM/FM BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE BAR

PRESETBARS

SEEK BAR

PWR/VOL KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

EX and LX-V6

－

－－

CONTINUED

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset bars.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Push the on the TUNE bar totune to a higher frequency, or pushthe to tune to a lower frequency.Hold the bar down until the displayreaches the desired frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressthe SEEK bar ( or ) untilyou hear a beep, then release it.Depending on which side of theSEEK bar you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Audio System


TUNE

SEEK SCAN

165

－

－

－

－

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the three preset bars.Each bar will store two frequencieson the AM band, and fourfrequencies on the FM band.

To store a frequency:Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbar.


Pick the preset number (1 6)you want for that station. Pressthe left or right side of the bar andhold it until you hear a beep.


Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the left orright side of the proper preset bar totune to it.



To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset bars (1 6).You can then use the preset bars toselect those stations.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Audio System


Preset AUTO SELECT

166

CONTINUED

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press the left orright side of any preset bar that doesnot have a station stored.

Audio System


AM/FM BUTTON A. SEL INDICATOR A. SEL BUTTON

PRESETBARS

TUNE BARSEEK BAR

SCAN BUTTON


If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the preset bars.Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset bars as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you set previously.When you return home, turn offAuto Select by pressing the A. SELbutton. The preset bars will thenselect the frequencies you originallyset.

For information, see page .194

Audio System


Radio Frequencies and Reception

168

SEEK BAR

SCAN BUTTON

EX and LX-V6

AM/FMBUTTON

A.SEL INDICATOR

PRESETBARS

TUNE BAR

A. SELBUTTON

－

－

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe SOUND button, then turn theVOLUME knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAd to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theSOUND button.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the SOUNDbutton. Adjust the desired mode byturning the VOLUME knob.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAd adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

CONTINUED

Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

Audio System


VOLUME KNOB

Adjustment Level LEVEL GAUGE

SOUNDBUTTON


The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.The level gauge on the display alsoshows you the range.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theVOLUME knob.

Select BAL or FAd by pressing theSOUND button. Adjust the Balanceor Fader to your liking by turningthe VOLUME knob.

Audio System


EX and LX-V6

LEVEL GAUGEAdjustment Level

VOLUME KNOB

SOUNDBUTTON

The audio system usually shows thetime when the ignition switch is inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

To set the time, press the Clock Setbutton (SOUND) until you hear abeep. The displayed time begins toblink.

Press and hold the H (Preset 4) sideof the bar until the hour advances tothe desired time.

Press and hold the M (Preset 5) sideof the bar until the minutes advanceto the desired time.

Press the Clock Set button(SOUND) again to enter the set time.

CONTINUED

Digital Clock

Audio System


PRESET BARS

DIGITAL CLOCK

CLOCK SET BUTTON


For example:1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the time setting will belost. To set the time again, follow thesetting procedure.

You can use the R (Preset 6) side ofthe bar to quickly set the time to thenearest hour. Press the Clock Setbutton (SOUND) until you hear abeep, then press the R (Preset 6)side of the bar. If the displayed timeis before the half hour, pressing Rsets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, pressing R sets theclock forward to the beginning of thenext hour.

Audio System


EX and LX-V6

DIGITAL CLOCK

CLOCK SET BUTTON

PRESET BARS

Your Honda’s audio system has anin-dash CD changer that holds up tosix discs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio.

To load CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Load and play only standard rounddiscs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam inthe drive or cause other problems.Avoid using CDs that have adhesive-type labels. The edges can curl upand cause the CD to jam in the drive.You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

CONTINUED

Operating the CD Changer

Audio System


RPT BUTTONDISC AND TRACKNUMBERS

CD BUTTON

CD LOAD INDICATOR

RDMBUTTON

CD SLOT

EJECTBUTTON

LOAD BUTTON


To load a single CD:

Press and release the LOADbutton.

The system will load the CD, andbegin playing it.

The disc number for an emptyposition starts to blink and thegreen CD load indicator comes on.When you see ‘‘LOAd’’ in thedisplay, insert the disc into the CDslot. Insert it only about halfway;the drive will pull it in the rest ofthe way.

Insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of the

way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD load indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

On the upper side of the display,the disc number for an emptyposition will begin blinking and thegreen CD load indicator will comeon.

Press and hold the LOAD buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘LOAd’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

To load multiple CDs in oneoperation:


When the CD load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAd’’ appears in thedisplay, insert the next disc intothe CD slot.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, the system will beginplaying the last CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, and you do notpress the LOAD button, the systemwill wait for ten seconds, then stopthe load operation and begin playingthe last CD loaded.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

Audio System


Loading CDs in the Changer

174

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate side of apreset bar. Select an empty position(the disc number indicator is off),and press the left or right side of thepreset bar for that position (1 to 6).The system will stop playing thecurrent CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

If you press the LOAD button whilea CD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

CONTINUED

Audio System


LOAD BUTTON

EX and LX-V6

DISC AND TRACK NUMBERS

CD BUTTON CD LOAD INDICATOR RPT BUTTON

RDMBUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

CD SLOT

－

－

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate side of a preset bar (16). If you select an empty position inthe CD changer, the system will gointo the loading sequence (see page

).

Each time you press andrelease it, the system skips forwardto the beginning of the next track.Press and release to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press and release itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious track.

You can use the SKIP bar while adisc is playing to select passages andchange tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the left or right side of theSKIP bar. You will hear a beep andthe system will continue to move.Press to move forward, or

to move backward. Release thebar when the system reaches thepoint you want.

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ inthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

This feature, whenactivated, samples all the tracks onthe selected disc in the order theyare recorded on the CD. To activatethe Scan feature, select the Scanmode by pressing the SCAN button.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will then play the firsttrack for approximately ten seconds.If you do nothing, the system willthen play the following tracks for tenseconds each. When it plays a trackthat you want to continue listening to,press the SCAN button again.

174

Operation

Audio System


SCAN

176

－

CONTINUED

This feature, whenactivated, samples each first track ofall the discs in the CD changer in theorder they are stored. To activatethe Scan feature, select the D-Scanmode by pressing and holding theSCAN button. You will see D-SCANin the display. The system will thenplay the first track of the first CD forapproximately ten seconds.If you do nothing, the system willthen play the next CD’s first track.When it plays a disc that you want tocontinue listening to, press theSCAN button again.

Audio System


D-SCAN

177

RDM BUTTONSCAN BUTTONLOAD BUTTON

PRESET BARS

CD BUTTON SCAN INDICATOR

RPT BUTTON

RDM INDICATOR

RPT INDICATORSKIP BAR


－ To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay as a reminder. The systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing either side of theSKIP or TUNE bar also turns off therepeat feature.

Audio System


REPEAT

178

RDM BUTTONSCAN BUTTONLOAD BUTTON

PRESET BARS

CD BUTTON SCAN INDICATOR

RPT BUTTON

RDM INDICATOR

RPT INDICATORSKIP BAR

EX and LX-V6

－－

CONTINUED

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button. Each timeyou press the AM/FM button, thesystem will change to the next mode;FM1, FM2 or AM. When you returnto CD mode by pressing the CDbutton, play will continue at the samepoint that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

This feature, whenactivated, replays all the tracks onthe selected disc in the order theyare recorded on the CD. To activatethe disc repeat feature, select the D-Repeat mode by pressing andholding the RPT button. You will seeD-RPT in the display. The systemcontinuously replays the current CD.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff. Pressing either side of the SKIPor TUNE bar also turns off therepeat feature.

This feature,when activated, plays the trackswithin a CD in random order, ratherthan in the order they are recordedon the CD. To activate Random Play,press the RDM button. You will seeRDM in the display. The system willthen select and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again, or you select adifferent CD with a preset bar.

Audio System

D-REPEAT RANDOM PLAY


To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. Whenyou remove the disc from the slot,the system automatically begins theLoad sequence so you can loadanother CD in that position. If you donot load another CD, after 15seconds, the system selects theprevious mode (AM, FM1, or FM2).

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 15 seconds, and select theprevious mode (AM or FM). Tobegin playing the disc, press the CDbutton.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with the left orright side of the appropriate presetbar. When that CD begins playing,press the eject button.

Removing CDs from the Changer

Audio System


CD SLOT

CDBUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

EJECT BUTTONAM/FM BUTTON


If you press the eject button whilelistening to the radio, or with theaudio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the CDs from the changer.

In any mode, if you press the ejectbutton and hold it until you hear abeep, the system will eject all of thediscs in the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first. Youcan eject all six discs, one at a time.


.205

Audio System



181

CDBUTTON

EJECT BUTTONAM/FM BUTTON CD SLOT

PWR/VOL KNOB

EX and LX-V6

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Indication SolutionCause

Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Hondadealer.Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Hondadealer.Insert CDs.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

No CD in the CDChanger


Audio System


＊

＊



2



CONTINUED


Audio System


RPTBUTTONCD/AUX

BUTTON

NOISE REDUCTION INDICATOR

RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION INDICATORAM/FM BUTTON

PRESET BARS



▲

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the Preset 3(PLAY/PROG) side of the presetbar.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. The indi-cator will light in the display. If thetape was not recorded with Dolbynoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the Preset 4 (NR) side ofthe preset bar.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.

Audio System


RPTBUTTON

CD/AUXBUTTON

PRESET BARS


NOISE REDUCTION INDICATOR

AM/FM BUTTON TAPE DIRECTION INDICATORRPT INDICATOR

EX and LX-V6

－

－


side to advance to thebeginning of the next song orpassage, or the side to return tothe beginning of the current song orpassage. FF or REW will flash in thedisplay as the tape moves. When thesystem reaches the beginning of thenext song or passage (FF), or thebeginning of the current one (REW),it goes back to PLAY mode.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the Preset 1(REW) side of the preset bar. Youwill see REW in the display. To fastforward the tape, push the Preset 2(FF) side of the preset bar. You willsee FF displayed. Press the Preset 1,2, or 3 side of the bars to take the sys-tem out of rewind or fast forward.When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it reverses direction andbegins to play.


When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the eject buttonon the cassette player.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the cassette player will be inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) side ofthe preset bar.


CONTINUED

SKIP

FF/REW

Tape Search Functions

Audio System


－ The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

210

REPEAT Caring for the Cassette Player

Audio System


Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset icons in theNavigation System display allow youto easily select your favorite stations.

The in-dash CD changer holds up tosix discs. You operate the CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. See page for CDchanger operation.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thecar’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).

196

212

AM/FM/CD ChangerAudio System


Audio System


AM/FM BUTTON

SEEK BAR

SCANBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

AUTOSELECT ICON SCAN ICON

UPPERDISPLAY

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

PRESETICONS

TUNE/MODEKNOB

－

－

－

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob, the AM/FM button, orthe AUDIO DISPLAY button. Adjustthe volume by turning the PWR/VOL knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will beseen in the upper display if thestation is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction on AM is notavailable.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset icons.

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, push and release theSCAN button on the driver’s side ofthe audio display or touch the SCANicon at the bottom of the display.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan up the band fora station with a strong signal. Whenit finds one, it will stop and play thatstation for approximately fiveseconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then scan for the nextstrong station and play that for fiveseconds. When it plays a station thatyou want to continue listening to,press the SCAN button or touch theSCAN icon again.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob to the right to tune toa higher frequency, or to the left totune to a lower frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressthe SEEK bar ( or ) untilyou hear a beep, then release it.Depending on which side of theSEEK bar you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

Operating the Radio SCAN

TUNE

SEEK

Audio System


－

－

－

CONTINUED

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset icons. Eachicon will store one frequency on theAM band, and two frequencies onthe FM band.

To store a frequency:Push the AUDIO DISPLAY buttonto view the audio display. You willsee the six preset icons.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each preseticon.


Pick the preset icon (1 6) youwant for that station. Touch theicon, and hold it until you hear abeep.


Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply touch the proper preset iconto tune to it.



To activate Auto Select, touch theAuto Select icon on the display. TheA.SEL indicator will flash in theupper display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset icons. You canthen use the preset icons to selectthose stations.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Audio System


Preset AUTO SELECT

189

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will not see astation number on the correspondingpreset icon.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the preset icons.Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset icons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by touching theAUTO SELECT icon. The preseticons will then select the frequenciesyou originally set.

Audio System


AM/FM BUTTON

UPPERDISPLAY

PWR/VOL KNOB

A.SEL INDICATOR

SCAN ICON

SCANBUTTON

SEEK BAR

AUTO SELECTICON

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

PRESETICONS

TUNE KNOB

－

－

To adjust the bassand treble, touch the or

arrows next to the BASS orTRE icons. The adjustment barabove each button shows you thecurrent setting.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. To adjust them,enter the sound grid by touching theSOUND icon on the display orpressing the TUNE knob.

CONTINUED

Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

Audio System


BASS ADJUSTICONS

TREBLE ADJUSTICONS

RETURNICON

BALANCEADJUSTICONS

SOUNDGRID

FADERADJUSTICONS

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

TUNE KNOB

To adjust the balance, touch the leftor right arrows on the sound grid.When you touch an arrow, the pinkbars on the grid move toward it,changing the balance left or right. Toequalize the balance, touch the leftor right arrow until each side has apink bar at the center of the soundgrid.

To adjust the fader, touch the frontor rear arrows on the sound grid.When you touch an arrow, the bluebars on the grid move toward it,changing the fader to the front orrear. To equalize the fader, touch thefront or rear arrow until each sidehas a blue bar at the center of thesound grid.

To see the audio screen when youare finished adjusting the sound,touch the RETURN icon or wait fiveseconds.

Audio System


DIGITAL CLOCK

UPPERDISPLAY

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

SOUNDICON

If you want to adjust the sound whilethe radio/CD is playing, push theAUDIO DISPLAY button, then touchthe SOUND icon in the display.

To return to the previous display,push the AUDIO DISPLAY buttonagain.

The upper display shows the timewhen the ignition switch is inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). TheNavigation System receives signalsfrom the Global Positioning System(GPS), and the displayed time isupdated automatically by the GPS.Refer to the Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual to set up the time.

Digital Clock

Audio System


Your Honda’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

How well your Honda’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, and atmos-pheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Audio System


Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Audio System


Your Honda’s audio system has anin-dash CD changer that holds up tosix discs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio.

To load CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Load and play only standard rounddiscs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam inthe drive or cause other problems.Avoid using CDs that have adhesive-type labels. The edges can curl upand cause the CD to jam in the drive.You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Operating the CD Changer

Audio System


PWR/VOLKNOB

CD SLOT

UPPER DISPLAY

CD/AUXBUTTON

LOAD BUTTON

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

DISC BAR

CD LOADINDICATOR

EJECTBUTTON

To load a single CD:

Press and release the LOADbutton.

The disc number icon for anempty position is highlighted onthe Navigation System display andthe green CD load indicator comeson. When you see ‘‘LOAd’’ in theupper display, insert the disc intothe CD slot. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way.

The system will load the CD, andbegin playing it.

When ‘‘LOAd’’ appears again inthe display, insert the next discinto the CD slot.

Insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD load indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

Press and hold the LOAD buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘LOAd’’ in the upper display, thenrelease the button.

To load multiple CDs in oneoperation:


Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, the system willwait for ten seconds, then stop theload operation and begin playing thelast CD loaded.1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Audio System


Loading CDs in the Changer

197

－

If you press the LOAD button whilea CD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bytouching the appropriate disc icon.Select an empty position (the discicon below the disc number is dark),and touch the icon for that position(1 6). The system will stop playingthe current CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

Audio System


AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

DISC ICONS

DISC NUMBER

CD/AUXBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

CD SLOT

LOADBUTTON

CD LOAD INDICATOR

EJECTBUTTON

DISC BAR

－▲

▼

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD/AUX button. You will see‘‘CD’’ in the upper display. Thesystem will begin playing the lastselected disc in the CD changer. Youwill see the disc and track numbersdisplayed.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

Each time you press and release thetop of the SKIP bar, the systemskips forward to the beginning of thenext track. Press and release thebottom to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to skip to the beginning ofthe previous track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the top or bottom of theSKIP bar. You will hear a beep andthe system will continue to movethrough the track. Press tomove forward, or to movebackward. Release the bar when thesystem reaches the point you want.

To select a different disc, touch theappropriate disc icon (1 6) orpress the upper side ( ) or thelower side ( ) of the DISC bar nextto the audio display. If you select anempty position in the CD changer,the system will go into the loadingsequence (see page ).

You can use the SKIP bar while adisc is playing to select passages andchange tracks.

When you touch the TRACK SCANicon on the audio display or press theSCAN button next to the display, thefirst track of the current CD playsfor about 10 seconds. You will seeTRACK SCAN in the display (orSCAN in the upper display). To hearthe rest of the track, touch TRACKSCAN or press SCAN button again,within 10 seconds. If you don’t, thesystem advances to the next track,plays about 10 seconds of it, andcontinues through the rest of thetracks the same way.

197

CONTINUED

Operation

Audio System


Track Scan

199

When you touch the DISC SCANicon on the audio display, the firsttrack of the current CD plays forabout 10 seconds. You will see DISCSCAN in the display (or D-SCAN inthe upper display). To hear the restof the CD, touch DISC SCAN again,within 10 seconds. If you don’t, thesystem advances to the next CD,plays about 10 seconds of its firsttrack, and continues through the restof the CDs the same way.

When you touch the TRACK RPTicon on the audio display, the systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. As a reminder, you will seeTRACK REPEAT in the display (orRPT in the upper display). To turnthis feature off, touch TRACKREPEAT again.

When you touch the DISC RPT iconon the audio display, the systemcontinuously replays the current CD.As a reminder, you will see DISCREPEAT in the display (or D-RPT inthe upper display). To turn thisfeature off, touch Disc RPT again.

When you touch the RANDOM iconon the audio display, the systemplays the tracks of the current CD inrandom order, rather than in theorder they were recorded. As areminder, you will see TRACKRANDOM in the display (or RDM inthe upper display). To turn thisfeature off, touch RANDOM again,or select a different CD with one ofthe disc icons.

Audio System


Disc Scan Track Repeat

Disc Repeat

Random Play

200

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button. Each timeyou press the AM/FM button, thesystem changes to the next mode(AM, FM1, or FM2). When youreturn to CD mode by pressing theCD button, play will continue at thesame point that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

CONTINUED

Audio System


AM/FMBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

CD BUTTON

SCANBUTTON

DISCICONS

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the upper andaudio displays. When you removethe disc from the slot, the systemautomatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherCD in that position. If you do notload another CD, after 15 seconds,the system selects the previousmode (AM, FM1, or FM2).

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 15 seconds and put the CDchanger in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate disc icon or the DISC bar.When that CD begins playing, pressthe eject button.

Removing CDs from the Changer

Audio System


CD SLOT

DISC BAR

EJECTBUTTON

CDBUTTON


.

If you press the eject button whilelistening to the radio, or with theaudio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the CDs from the changer.

In any mode, if you press the ejectbutton and hold it until you hear abeep, the system will eject all of thediscs in the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off by pressing theeject button. The disc that was lastselected is ejected first. You caneject all six discs, one at a time.

205


Audio System


IndicationIf you see an error indication in theupper display while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

SolutionCause

Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Hondadealer.Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Hondadealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature


Audio System


Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These and contamination fromfingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip penscan cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.


Audio System


＊

＊



2




Audio System


PWR/VOLKNOB

CD/AUXBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

AM/FMBUTTON

CH/DISCBAR

RPT ICON NR ICONPLAY/PROGICON

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATORRPT INDICATOR

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

▲

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noise reduc-tion, push the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton to change to the audio display,and turn it off by touching the NRicon on the display.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the icon again.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the eject buttonon the cassette player.


The tape direction indicator will lighton the upper display to show youwhich side of the cassette is playing.The indicates the side youinserted facing upward is nowplaying. If you want to play the otherside, push the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton to change to the audio display,and touch the PLAY/PROG icon.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the cassette player will be inpause mode. To begin playing, pushthe AUDIO DISPLAY button tochange to the audio display, andtouch the PLAY/PROG icon.

Audio System


－－

▲

▼



side to advance to thebeginning of the next song orpassage, or the side to return tothe beginning of the current song orpassage. FF or REW will be shown inthe upper display as the tape moves.When the system reaches thebeginning of the next song orpassage (FF), or the beginning ofthe current one (REW), it goes backto PLAY mode.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the upper side( ) of the CH DISC bar. You willsee REW in the display. To fast for-ward the tape, push the lower side( ) of the CH DISC bar. You willsee FF displayed. Press either side ofthe CH DISC bar or touch thePLAY/PROG icon in the audiodisplay to take the system out of re-wind or fast forward. When the sys-tem reaches the end of the tape, itreverses direction and begins to play.

Tape Search Functions SKIPFF/REW

Audio System


－ The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the AUDIODISPLAY button to change to theaudio display, and touch the RPTicon in the display to activate it; youwill see RPT displayed in the upperdisplay as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by touching theicon again.

REPEAT

Audio System


The cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

If you see the error indication‘‘ ’’ flashing on the display,press the TAPE eject button toremove the cassette from the unit.Make sure the tape is not damaged.If the cassette will not eject or theerror indication stays on after thecassette ejects, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

If you see the error indication‘‘ ’’ on the upper display,press the TAPE eject button toremove the cassette from the unit.Make sure the tape is not damaged.If the cassette will not eject or theerror indication stays on after thecassette ejects, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

On Audio system with NavigationSystem

On Audio systems without NavigationSystem

Caring for the Cassette Player

Audio System


▲ ▼

＋

－

＋－

＋

－Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,CD (if a CD is loaded), or a cassette(if equipped).

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumber in the display.

If you are playing a tape in theoptional cassette player, press thetop ( ) of the CH button to advanceto the next selection. Press thebottom ( ) to go back to theprevious selection. The systemsenses a silent period, then goesback to play mode.

On all EX and V6 models

Remote Audio Controls

Audio System


CH BUTTONVOL BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

－

Your car’s audio system will disableitself if it is disconnected fromelectrical power for any reason. Tomake it work again, the user mustenter a specific code using the presetbars or the TUNE knob. Becausethere are hundreds of numbercombinations possible, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system’s serial number inthis Owner’s Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourHonda dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

When all the digits in the code areentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have ten tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin ten attempts, you must then leavethe system on for one hour beforetrying again.

If your car is equipped with anavigation system, press and releasethe TUNE knob; the number ‘‘0’’appears on the display.

You will have to store your favoritestations on each side of the presetbars (1 6) after the system beginsworking. Your original settings werelost when power was disconnected.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the radio fuse isremoved, the audio system willdisable itself. If this happens, youwill see ‘‘ ’’/‘‘ ’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbars to enter the code.

If ‘‘0’’ is not the first digit in yourcode, turn the TUNE knob left orright until the first digit isdisplayed. Press and release theTUNE knob to store it. Enter theremaining digits the same way.

If ‘‘0’’ is the first digit in your code,press and release the TUNE knobto store it.

On EX, EX-V6 and LX-V6 modelsTheft Protection

Audio System


Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

Once the security system is set,opening either door (without usingthe key or the remote transmitter),the hood, or the trunk will cause it tosound. It also sounds if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk lock is forced, or the trunk isopened with the trunk release handleor the emergency trunk opener.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or either door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door and Trunk OpenMonitor on the instrument panel(see page ), to see if the doorsand trunk are fully closed. Since it isnot part of the monitor display,manually check the hood.

The security system helps to protectyour car and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourcar or remove the radio. This alarmcontinues for two minutes, then thesystem resets. To reset an alarmingsystem before the two minutes haveelapsed, unlock the driver’s doorwith the key or the remotetransmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemindicator on the instrument panelstarts blinking immediately to showyou the system is setting itself.

65

On all models except for 4-cylinder LXmodel

Security System



Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Push in the Cruise Control MasterButton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE MAIN light on theinstrument panel comes on.

Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.The CRUISE CONTROL light onthe instrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the car underthose conditions.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

1.

2.

3.Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control


CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

DECEL/SETBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. The car will accelerate.When you reach the desiredcruising speed, release the button.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the DECEL/SETbutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button repeatedly. Eachtime you do this, your car willspeed up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. The car will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the DECEL/SETbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your car will slow downabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the DECEL/SETbutton. The car will then maintainthe desired speed.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The carwill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal will cause the cruisecontrol to cancel.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control


Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, theCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out and thecar will begin to slow down. You canuse the accelerator pedal in thenormal way.

The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL light comeson, and the car will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Press the Cruise Control Masterbutton on the steering wheel.

Pressing the Cruise Control Masterbutton turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to

.

Cancelling the Cruise Control

Using theCruise Control

Cruise Control


CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. Garage dooropeners manufactured before thatdate do not have a safety feature thatcauses them to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury. If youhave questions, call (800) 355-3515.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour car’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

The HomeLink Wireless ControlSystem built into your car can beprogrammed to operate remotely-controlled devices around your home,such as garage doors, lighting, orhome security systems. It canreplace up to three remotetransmitters.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Wireless ControlSystem, or would like information onhome products that can be operatedby the transmitter, call (800) 355-3515. On the Internet, go to www.homelink.com.

Always refer to the operatinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information, youshould contact the manufacturer ofthe equipment.

For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote controltransmitter for the device (garagedoor, automatic gate, securitysystem, etc.) has a fresh battery.

While training or using HomeLink,make sure you have a clear view ofthe garage door or gate, and that noone will be injured by its movement.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, it isrecommended that you unplug themotor for that device during training.Repeatedly pressing the remotecontrol button could burn out themotor.

On EX-V6 model Important Safety Precautions

Customer Assistance

General Information

HomeLink Wireless Control System


－

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to Step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Before you can use HomeLink tooperate devices around your home, itmust ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. Forexample, to train HomeLink to openand close the garage door:

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red light in HomeLink.

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

Press the button on the remotecontrol and the button onHomeLink at the same time. Holddown both buttons.

If you just tookdelivery of your car and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on HomeLink for about 20seconds, until the red light flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed toStep 1.

2.

3.

4.1.

Training HomeLink Before you begin



For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so they send andreceive the correct codes.

The red light in HomeLink shouldbegin flashing. It will flash slowlyat first, then rapidly.

When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. HomeLinkshould have learned the code fromthe remote control.

The remote control you are trainingmay stop transmitting after twoseconds. This is not long enough forHomeLink to learn the code. Releaseand press the button on the remotecontrol every two seconds untilHomeLink has learned the code.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it. It shouldoperate the garage door.

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If itstill does not work, you may have avariable or rolling code garagedoor opener. Test this by pressingand holding the HomeLink buttonyou just trained. If the red lightblinks for two seconds, then stayson, you have a rolling code garagedoor opener. You may be able toverify this with the manufacturer’sdocumentation. Go to ‘‘TrainingWith a Rolling Code System.’’

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

5.

6.8.

7.

CONTINUED

Canadian Owners: Training With a Rolling CodeSystem



－

－

It may be helpful to have someoneassist you with this procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer. Themanufacturer’s documentationmay help.

Press the Training button on thegarage door opener unit until thelight next to the button comes on,then release it. The light may blink,or come on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 4 seconds.(The same button you trained withthe ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 4 seconds.This should turn off the traininglight on the garage door openerunit. (Some systems may requireyou to press the button up to threetimes.)

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.



TRAINING BUTTON




You should erase all three codesbefore selling the car.

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton until the red light begins toflash slowly (approximately 20seconds).

While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, place theremote control for the device 2 to5 inches from HomeLink.

Release both buttons. HomeLinkshould now be trained to operatethe device.

Press and hold the button on theremote control. Hold both buttonsuntil the red light begins to flashrapidly.

To train an already programmedHomeLink button to operate a newdevice:

To erase the codes stored in all threeHomeLink buttons, press and holdthe two outside buttons until the redlight begins to flash, then release thebuttons.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.Retraining a Button

Erasing Codes



Before you begin driving your Honda,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your car,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 224.........................................Gasoline . 224

.........Service Station Procedures . 225................Filling the Fuel Tank . 225

....................Opening the Hood . 226...............................Oil Check . 228

.........Engine Coolant Check . 230...............................Fuel Economy . 231

............................Car Condition . 231...........................Driving Habits . 231

...Accessories and Modifications . 232.............................Carrying Cargo . 234

Before Driving

Before Driving 223

During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

Help assure your car’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are relined.

Do not change the oil until therecommended time or mileageinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

Your Honda is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise in the engine that can lead tomechanical damage.

In Canada, some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emission control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Honda dealer for service.

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

If you drive with the low enginespeed (below than about 1,000 rpm),you may feel the engine knocking. Inthis case, you can use premiumunleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 91 or higher toprevent the engine from knocking.

On EX-V6 with manual transmission

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline

Break-in Period, Gasoline

224

Open the fuel fill door by pushingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver’s side of the vehicle, parkwith that side closest to theservice station pumps.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Put thetether end attachment on the fuelfill cap into the slot on the fuel filldoor.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Your vehicle has an on-boardrefueling vapor recovery system tohelp keep fuel vapors from goinginto the atmosphere. If the fuelnozzle keeps clicking off eventhough the tank is not full, theremay be a problem with this system.Consult your dealer.

3.

4.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Filling the Fuel Tank

225

FUEL FILL CAP

TETHER

Push

ATTACHMENT

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Standing in front of the vehicle,reach in between the hood and thefront grille with your finger. Thehood latch handle is above and tothe left of the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push thishandle up until it releases thehood. Lift the hood.

Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

1. 2.

5.

381

6.


Before Driving

Opening the Hood

226

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH

CONTINUED

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop.

After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

To close the hood, lower it to about afoot (30 cm) above the fender, thenpress down firmly with your hands.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

If you can open the hood withoutlifting the hood latch handle, or thehood latch handle moves stiffly ordoes not spring back as before, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page ).

Pull the support rod out of its clipby holding the grip and insert theend into the hole on the front ofthe hood around the center.

3.

318

6-cylinder models

4-cylinder models

Before Driving


227

GRIP

CLIP

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the car with fuel. Wait a fewminutes after turning the engine offbefore you check the oil.

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle/loop).

1.

2.


Before Driving

Oil Check

228


DIPSTICK(Orange Handle)

DIPSTICK(Orange Loop)

CONTINUED

Insert it all the way back in its tube. Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

3. 4.

294


Before Driving

Adding Oil

229

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourHonda.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

299

291


Before Driving

Owner MaintenanceChecks

AddingEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant Check

230

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

RESERVE TANK

4-cylinder models

MIN

MAX

MAX RESERVE TANK

6-cylinder models MIN6-cylinder models

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try tocombine several short trips into one.

You can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C tocut down on air conditioning use.Use the flow-through ventilationwhen the outside air temperature ismoderate.

The condition of your car and yourdriving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

Always maintain your car accordingto the maintenance schedule. Thiswill keep it in top operating condition.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your car uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the

(see page ). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour car’s underside adds weight androlling resistance. Frequent cleaninghelps your fuel mileage and reducesthe chance of corrosion.

291

Driving Habits

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Car Condition

Fuel Economy

Before Driving 231

Modifying your car, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your car unsafe. Before youmake any modifications or add anyaccessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your car’scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize your car.These accessories have beendesigned and approved for your car,and are covered by warranty.

Non-Honda accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your car, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your car’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on page foradditional information.)

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour car’s electrical system capacity,they can interfere with the operationof your car, or even cause theairbags to deploy.

If possible, have your dealer inspectthe final installation.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper car operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ).

Have the installer contact yourHonda dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

233

386

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving232

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourcar’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Hondaseat cover for example, couldprevent the airbag from inflatingproperly.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the car andhurt someone.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Honda (aftermarket) componentscould seriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult with your Honda dealer.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

Lowering the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to impact speedbumps or other raised objects,which could cause the airbags todeploy.

Raising the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Aftermarket wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

On models equipped with side airbags orside curtain airbags

Modifications

Additional Safety Precautions

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving

Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

233

Your car has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

The glove box, and the pockets inthe doors and seat-backs, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The trunk is intended for larger,heavier items. In addition, the backseat can be folded down to allow youto carry more cargo or longer items.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour car’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving234

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

TRUNK GLOVE BOX

CENTER POCKET

DOOR POCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

×

－

Following are the steps fordetermining the correct cargo andluggage load limit.

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 850 lbs(395 kg)’’ on your car’s placard (onthe driver’s doorjamb).

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from850 lbs (395 kg).

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.

If your car will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will betransferred to your car. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your car.

The maximum load limit for your caris 850 lbs (395 kg). This figureincludes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, accessories, andthe tongue weight if you are towing atrailer.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your car. (Five isthe seating capacity of your car.)

For example, if there will be four 150lbs (70 kg) occupants in your car, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 250 lbs (115kg).4 150 lbs (70 kg) = 600 lbs (280kg)850 lbs (395 kg) 600 lbs (280 kg) =250 lbs (115 kg)

Determine the combined weightof accessories, luggage, and cargobeing loaded in the car. Theweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4 [250lbs (115 kg) in this example].

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Load Limit

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 235

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the car during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around the carduring a crash.

If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your Hondadealer for further information.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

56

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Top Carrier

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving236

The cargo net can be used to helphold down items stored in the trunk.To use the cargo net, hook it to thebuttons on the floor and sides of thetrunk. You can use the cargo net inseveral configurations by hooking itto different buttons.

When you are not using the cargonet, store it in the spare tire well.

There are hooks on the floor andsides of the trunk. They can be usedto install a net for securing items.


Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

Cargo NetTrunk Hooks

237

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate the5-speed/6-speed manual andautomatic transmissions. It alsoincludes important information onparking your car, the braking system,the Traction Control System, andfacts you need if you are planning totow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 240.......................Starting the Engine . 241

Starting in Cold Weather....................at High Altitude . 242

....5-speed Manual Transmission . 243.....Recommended Shift Points . 244

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 244....6-speed Manual Transmission . 245.....Recommended Shift Points . 246

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 246.......................Reverse Lockout . 246

..............Automatic Transmission . 248.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 248

................Shift Lever Positions . 248..............Engine Speed Limiter . 251

....................Shift Lock Release . 251...........................................Parking . 253

..............................Parking Tips . 253.....................The Braking System . 254

.............Brake Wear Indicators . 254...............Brake System Design . 255

.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 255Important Safety

.........................Reminders . 256........................ABS Indicator . 256

..............Traction Control System . 258...............TCS ON/OFF Switch . 259

.........TCS Activation Indicator . 259...............Driving in Bad Weather . 261

...........................Towing a Trailer . 263

Driving

Driving 239

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Check the adjustment of the seat(see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage ).

Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your car.

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

12.

10.

16

61

94

108

80

241

Preparing to Drive

Driving240

Push the clutch pedal down all theway. START (III) does notfunction unless the clutch pedal isdepressed.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Automatic Transmission:

Manual Transmission:

Starting the Engine

Driving 241

Use the following procedure:

Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

An engine is harder to start in coldweather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet(2,400 meters) adds to the problem.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

1.

2.

3.

Driving

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)

Starting the Engine

242

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the car moving. Pushdown the clutch pedal, and pause fora few seconds before shifting intoReverse, or shift into one of theforward gears for a moment. Thisstops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure engine speed will not gointo the tachometer’s red zone in thelower gear.

The manual transmission is syn-chronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse. When shifting up ordown, make sure you push the clutchpedal down all the way, shift to thenext gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

On all 4-cylinder models

Driving

5-speed Manual Transmission

243

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (25 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (65 km/h)50 mph (80 km/h)

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Cruise acceleration

7 mph (11 km/h)22 mph (35 km/h)33 mph (53 km/h)48 mph (77 km/h)

Driving

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter


244

The manual transmission is synchro-nized in all forward gears for smoothoperation. It has a lockout so youcannot shift directly from Fifth toReverse instead of Sixth (see page

). When shifting up or down,make sure you push the clutch pedaldown all the way, shift to the nextgear, and let the pedal up gradually.When you are not shifting, do notrest your foot on the clutch pedal.This can cause your clutch to wear

out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the car moving. Pushdown the clutch pedal, and pause fora few seconds before shifting intoReverse, or shift into one of theforward gears for a moment. Thisstops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure engine speed will not gointo the tachometer’s red zone in thelower gear.

Your car is equipped with analuminum shift lever. If you leave thecar parked outside for a long time ona hot day, be careful before movingthe shift lever. Because of the heat,the shift lever may be extremely hot.If the outside temperature is low, theshift lever feels cold.

246

On EX-V6 model


Driving 245

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)47 mph (75 km/h)52 mph (83 km/h)

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

The 6-speed manual transmissionhas an electric lockout so you cannotaccidentally shift from Fifth toReverse instead of Sixth while thecar is moving. If you cannot shift toReverse when the car is stopped:

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout


Driving246

With the clutch pedal depressed,move the shift lever to the First/Second gear side of the Neutralgate, then shift to Reverse.

If you are still unable to shift toReverse, apply the parking brakeand turn the ignition key toACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

Depress the clutch pedal and shiftto Reverse.

With the clutch pedal still de-pressed, start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to Reverse, your car may bedeveloping a problem. Have the carchecked by your Honda dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Driving 247

The shift lever has seven positions.It must be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD, D , 2, 1, N or R, press firmly onthe brake pedal, and keep your footoff the accelerator pedal.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If itflashes while driving (in any shiftposition), it indicates a possibleproblem in the transmission. Avoidrapid acceleration and have the trans-mission checked by an authorizedHonda dealer as soon as possible.

The malfunction indicator lamp maycome on along with the ‘‘D’’ indicatorif there is a problem in the automatictransmission control system.

This indicator between the tacho-meter and speedometer shows whichposition the shift lever is in.

Your Honda’s transmission has fiveforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

3

Shift Lever Positions

Shift Lever Position Indicator

Automatic Transmission

Driving248

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASE BUTTON

－

－

To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift. Press the release buttonbefore shifting into Reverse fromNeutral.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the side of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page

.

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

251

CONTINUED

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

3

3

3

3

Reverse (R)

Park (P)


Driving 249

－

－

－－

－

To shift to Second,press the release button on the sideof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop. Secondgives you more power when climbing,and increased engine braking whengoing down steep hills. Use secondgear when starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow. It will helpreduce wheelspin.

To shift from Second toFirst, press the release button on theside of the shift lever. With the leverin this position, the transmissionlocks in First gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, D , and D,you can operate this transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.

This position is similarto D, except only the first threegears are selected instead of all five.Use D when towing a trailer in hillyterrain, or to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. D canalso keep the transmission fromcycling between third and fourthgears in stop-and-go driving.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the car forany reason. Press on the brake pedalwhen you are moving the shift leverfrom Neutral to another gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear (1 through 5) for your speedand acceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.

For faster acceleration when in D orD, you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down one,two or three gears, depending onyour speed.

3

3

3

3

Second (2)

First (1)

Drive (D )Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

3


Driving250

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the Parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or small metalplate (neither are included in thetool kit) to remove the cover.Carefully pry off the edge of thecover.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Shift Lock ReleaseEngine Speed Limiter


Driving 251

COVER

Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to Neutral.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then reinstallthe cover. Make sure the notch onthe cover is on the left side.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your car isdeveloping a problem. Have the carchecked by your Honda dealer.

5.

6.

4.


Driving252

RELEASEBUTTON

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

－

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your car. The indicator onthe instrument panel shows that theparking brake is not fully released; itdoes not indicate that the parkingbrake is firmly set. Make sure theparking brake is set firmly or yourcar may roll if it is parked on anincline.

If your car has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the car frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission making it easier tomove the shift lever out of Parkwhen you want to drive away.

If the car is facing uphill, turn thefront wheels away from the curb. Ifyou have a manual transmission, putit in first gear.

If the car is facing downhill, turn thefront wheels toward the curb. If youhave a manual transmission, put it inreverse gear.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Turn off the lights.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

On cars with security system

Parking Tips

Parking

Driving 253

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

Your Honda is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

The front and rear disc brakes on allmodels have audible brake wearindicators. All models except for the4-cylinder LX have rear disc brakesas standard equipment.

When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic‘‘screeching’’ sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. Theindicators make a very audible‘‘screeching.’’

Brake Wear Indicators

The Braking System

Driving254

this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal; it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe car (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Your car has an Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS) as standardequipment. ABS helps to prevent thewheels from locking up and skiddingduring hard braking, allowing you toretain steering control.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the car continuesstraight ahead even though you turnthe steering wheel. The ABS helps toprevent lock-up and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly; much faster than aperson can do it.

The ABS also balances the front-torear braking distribution accordingto car loading.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

CONTINUED

Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump thebrake pedal;

Brake System Design

The Braking System

Driving 255

Front

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your car to veer intooncoming traffic or off the road.

itonly helps with steering controlduring braking. You should alwaysmaintain a safe following distancefrom other vehicles.

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage ). This means the anti-lockfunction of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your car as soon as possible.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

64

Important Safety Reminders ABS Indicator

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop the car;

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

The Braking System

Driving256

ABS INDICATOR

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also shutdown.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your carrepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The TCS indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

383

On all V6 models

The Braking System

Driving 257

Your Honda is equipped with aTraction Control System (TCS) toassist you in maintaining tractionwhile driving slowly on loose orslippery surfaces.

TCS monitors the speed of all fourwheels. When it senses a front wheellosing traction, it applies braking tothat wheel. The TCS Activationindicator flashes when this occurs.

Driving with TCS requires no specialskills or technique. The TCS doesnot control your car’s whole brakingsystem and cannot prevent skiddingif you enter a corner too fast. It isstill your responsibility to drive atreasonable speeds and to leave asufficient margin of safety.

When starting out or driving on aloose or slippery road surface, youmay notice that the car does notrespond to the accelerator in thesame way it does at other times. Thisis a sign TCS is activating. You willsee the TCS Activation indicatorlight flash.

The TCS indicator (see page )comes on and stays on when there isa problem with the TCS. The TCSActivation indicator will also come on.

You should still install winter tires onyour car during the winter. Makesure to use the same size originallysupplied with car. Exercise the samecaution in winter driving as youwould if your car was not equippedwith TCS.

Driving with the compact spare tireinstalled (see page ) mayactivate the TCS. You should turn offthe system.

64

364

On all V6 models

Traction Control System

Driving258

TCS INDICATOR

TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR

When you turn the ignition switchto ON (II).

When you manually turn off TCS.

It flashes when TCS is regulatingwheelspin.

The Traction Control System turnson every time you start the engine,even if you turned it off the last timeyou drove the car.

This switch is under the side vent. Itlets you turn the Traction ControlSystem on and off. You cannot turnoff the TCS while the TCS Activationlight is flashing.

Deactivate the system by pressingthe TCS On/Off switch. The TCSActivation indicator light comes onas a reminder. Pressing the switchagain turns the system back on.

If the system’s diagnostics sensesa problem with TCS, the indicatorwill come on and stay on alongwith the TCS indicator.

The TCS Activation indicator comeson or flashes under the followingconditions:

CONTINUED

TCS ON/OFF Switch TCS Activation Indicator


Driving 259

The TCS indicator may occasionallycome on for one or two seconds andthen go out. This is normal.

This indicator will come on alongwith the ABS indicator if there is aproblem in the anti-lock brakesystem (see on page

).

If the TCS indicator comes on alongwith the Brake System indicator, itindicates a problem in the brakesystem (see

on page ).

If the TCS indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe and turn off theengine. Reset the system by re-starting the engine, and watch theTCS indicator. If the indicatorremains on, or comes back on whiledriving, have the system inspectedby your Honda dealer. You can stilldrive the car without TCS.

256

383

ABS Indicator

Brake SystemIndicator


Driving260

－

CONTINUED

Rain, fog, and snow conditionsrequire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your car well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in theseconditions.

Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your car longer toreact, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills.

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving

Driving Technique

261

－－Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defroster and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepages , and ).136 144127

Visibility Traction

Driving

Driving in Bad Weather

262

Your Honda has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control.

The totalweight of the trailer andeverything loaded in it must notexceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towinga load that is too heavy canseriously affect your car’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Tongue Load:

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight:

263

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

(LX)

(EX, EX with leather interior)

(LX)

on the front axle

on the rear axle(EX, EX with leather interior)

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

4-cylinder models:

6-cylinder models:

4-cylinder models:

6-cylinder models:

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

264

4,080 lbs (1,850 kg)

4,125 lbs (1,870 kg)

4,300 lbs (1,950 kg)

2,195 lbs (995 kg)

1,960 lbs (890 kg)

2,225 lbs (1,010 kg)

1,985 lbs (900 kg)

2,360 lbs (1,070 kg)

2,005 lbs (910 kg)

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, andhow much load you are towing.

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedcar and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

Any hitch used on your car must beproperly bolted to the underbody.

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Checking Loads Hitches

265

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, and localregulations. Check with your localrecreational vehicle dealer for therequirements in your area, and useonly equipment designed for yourvehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’ s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Always use safety chains. Make surethey are secured to both the trailerand hitch, and that they cross underthe tongue so they can catch thetrailer if it becomes unhitched.Leave enough slack to allow thetrailer to turn corners easily, but donot let the chains drag on the ground.

Honda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into your car’shydraulic system. No matter howsuccessful it may seem, any attemptto attach trailer brakes to your car’shydraulic system will lower brakingeffectiveness and create a potentialhazard.

See your trailer dealer for moreinformation on installing electricbrakes.

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Trailer LightsSafety Chains Trailer Brakes

266

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The car has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition.

The lights and brakes on your carand the trailer are workingproperly.

Your car tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

263 264

334Additional Trailer Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist

Towing a Trailer

Driving 267

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.When climbing hills, closely watch

your temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect your car’shandling and performance, sodriving with a trailer requires somespecial driving skills and techniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesdiscussed below.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your car, and it canhit or run over something the carmisses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for cars with trailers. Ifyou have an automatic transmission,use D position when towing a traileron level roads. D is the proper shiftlever position to use when towing atrailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘

’’ in the next column foradditional gear information.)

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently within 3rd, 4th and 5thgears while going up a hill, shift toD .

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

3

3

Driving Safely With a Trailer Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Towing Speeds and Gears

Drivingon Hills

Towing a Trailer

Driving268

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge car, keep a constant speed andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

bottom

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

Towing a Trailer

Driving 269

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Honda, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Hondadealer.

This section explains the importanceof keeping your car well maintainedand why you should follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 272.Important Safety Precautions . 273

.................Maintenance Schedule . 274Maintenance Schedule

..................(4-cylinder Models) . 276

...Required Maintenance Record . 281Maintenance Schedule

..................(6-cylinder Models) . 284...Required Maintenance Record . 289

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 291..............................Fluid Locations . 292

......................................Engine Oil . 294..................................Adding Oil . 294

....................Recommended Oil . 294..............................Synthetic Oil . 295

....................................Additives . 296.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 296

.............................Cooling System . 299............Adding Engine Coolant . 299

.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 301....................Windshield Washers . 306

.......................Transmission Fluid . 307..........Automatic Transmission . 307

5-speed Manual.........................Transmission . 310


................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 313............................Brake System . 313...........................Clutch System . 314

..............................Power Steering . 315

.....................Air Cleaner Element . 316....................................Hood Latch . 318

Spark Plugs..................(4-cylinder Models) . 318

Spark Plugs..................(6-cylinder Models) . 321

...........................................Battery . 324.................................Wiper Blades . 327

..............Air Conditioning System . 329..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 330

.......................................Drive Belt . 332....................................Timing Belt . 332

...............................................Tires . 333......................................Inflation . 333

..................................Inspection . 335..............................Maintenance . 335.............................Tire Rotation . 336

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 336......................Wheels and Tires . 337

..........................Winter Driving . 338.............................Snow Tires . 338............................Tire Chains . 338

.............................................Lights . 340.....................Headlight Aiming . 342

........................Replacing Bulbs . 342...........................Storing Your Car . 354

413

Maintenance

Maintenance 271

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by a Hondatechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Regularly maintaining your car is thebest way to protect your investment.Proper maintenance is essential toyour safety and the safety of yourpassengers. It will also reward youwith more economical, trouble-freedriving, and help reduce air pollution.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance272

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining this caror failing to correct a problembefore driving can cause acrash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

Before you begin any maintenance,make sure your car is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

Important Safety Precautions

Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

273

－

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have your carserviced and what things needattention. It is essential that you haveyour car serviced as scheduled toretain its high level of safety,dependability, and emissions controlperformance.

Avoid exceeding your car’s loadlimit. This puts excess stress onthe engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your car. The loadlimit is shown on the label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Operate your car on reasonableroads within the legal speed limit.

Drive your car regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

The services and time or distanceintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourcar as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

Service your car according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions if you drive your carMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving less than 10miles (16 km) per trip.

Extensive idling or long periods ofstop-and-go driving, such as a taxior a commercial delivery vehicle.

Driving in extremely hot [over90°F (32°C)] conditions.

224

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow:

U.S. Owners

274

＃－

U.S. Cars:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Hondarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your car best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

Trailer towing, driving with a roofrack, or driving in mountainousconditions.

Driving on muddy, dusty, ordeiced roads.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

NOTE: If you onlydrive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, youshould follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Normal Conditions.

We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

OCCASIONALLY

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Canadian Owners

275

－

＃＊

＃

＃

＊

Maintenance

4-cylinder Models

276

Visually inspect the following items:

Service at the indicated distanceor time whichever comes first.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Inspect every 160,000 miles (256,000 km) or 8 years

Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 year


Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 yearsRotate tires every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)

Replace engine oilReplace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsInspect drive beltInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition atleast once per month)

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

1016

2032

3048

4064

5080

6096

70112

80128

90144

100160

110176

120192

M/TA/T

::

12 24 36 48 60 72

275

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

－－

□

□

□□

□□

□

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□□□

＃

＃

♯

Maintenance

4-cylinder Models

277

Canadian Owners

U.S. Owners

A, B, C, D

A

B

C

D

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.

10,000 mi/16,000 km20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr30,000 mi/48,000 km40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs50,000 mi/80,000 km3 yrs60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs70,000 mi/112,000 km80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs110,000 mi/176,000 km6 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

9 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, D.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, C.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T).Replace transmission fluid (A/T), then

replace every 90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs.Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Replace engine coolant, then

replace every 60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.Do items in A, B.

Inspect idle speed.

Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 336 ).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Replace air cleaner element (independent of time).Inspect drive belt.Replace dust and pollen filter.Inspect valve clearance (independent of time).Replace spark plugs (independent of time).

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

NOTE:

:

274

275

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

－

＃＊

＊

＃

＃

Maintenance

4-cylinder Models

278




Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stopEvery 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)

Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy



See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.




Inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 year

Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 yearsLubricate every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 year

Rotate tires every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)

Inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 year

At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years

Replace engine oilReplace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsInspect drive beltInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant


Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterLubricate all hinges, locks, and latchesRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition atleast once per month)


Lights and controls, vehicle underbody

2032

3048

1016

4064

5080

6096

70112

80128

90144

100160

110176

120192

M/TA/T

::

12 24 36 60 7248

275330

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

－－

□

□

□□□□

□□□□□□□□

□□□□□□□□

＃

＃

＊

＊

＃

CONTINUEDMaintenance

4-cylinder Models

279

Canadian Owners

U.S. Owners

A, B, C, D, E, F

A

B

C

D

E

F


Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.

5,000 mi/8,000 km10,000 mi/16,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr25,000 mi/40,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km35,000 mi/56,000 km40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km50,000 mi/80,000 km3 yrs55,000 mi/88,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs

65,000 mi/104,000 km70,000 mi/112,000 km

Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B, D.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, C, E.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, D.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do item in A.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T, A/T).Do items in A, B, C, D, E.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.

Replace engine oil.Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches withmultipurpose grease.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 336 ).Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect drive shaft boots.Replace air cleaner element (independent of time).Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Inspect drive belt.Replace dust and pollen filter .Inspect valve clearance (independent of time).Replace spark plugs (independent of time).

274


See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement informationunder special driving conditions.

:

:

NOTE:

330275

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

□

□

□□

□□

□

Maintenance

4-cylinder Models

280


NOTE:75,000 mi/120,000 km80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs85,000 mi/136,000 km90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs

95,000 mi/152,000 km100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs105,000 mi/168,000 km110,000 mi/176,000 km6 yrs115,000 mi/184,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

9 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 yrs

Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B, D.Do item in A.

Replace transmission fluid (A/T).Do items in A, B, C, E.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, D.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B, F.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do item in A.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T).Replace transmission fluid (A/T), then replace

every 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs.Do items in A, B, C, D, E.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Replace engine coolant, then replace every

60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.Do items in A, B, D.

Inspect idle speed.

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

(lis

ted

by

dis

tance

/tim

e)


Required Maintenance Record for 4-cylinder Models (Normal and Severe Schedules)

281

30,000 mi

35,000 mi

40,000 mi

45,000 mi

50,000 mi

5,000 mi

10,000 mi

15,000 mi

20,000 mi

25,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.

48,000 km

56,000 km

64,000 km(or 2 years)

72,000 km

80,000 km

8,000 km

16,000 km

24,000 km

32,000 km(or 1 year)

40,000 km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

278276

Maintenance


282

80,000 mi

85,000 mi

90,000 mi

95,000 mi

100,000 mi

55,000 mi

60,000 mi

65,000 mi

70,000 mi

75,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp128,000 km(or 4 years)

136,000 km

144,000 km

152,000 km


88,000 km


104,000 km

112,000 km

120,000 km

Date

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

Date

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Maintenance


283

105,000 mi

110,000 mi

115,000 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp168,000 km

176,000 km

184,000 km


mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

mi/km

Date

Date

Date

Date

－

＃

＃

＃

6-cylinder Models

Maintenance284






Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)Inspect every 105,000 miles (168,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Replace engine oilReplace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pumpInspect drive beltReplace engine coolant


Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition atleast once per month)




152412

304824

457236

609648

7512060

9014472

10516884

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 yearsEvery 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years

12019296

: 275

M/TA/T

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

－－

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□

□

□

□□

□

□

□

□□

＃

＃

♯

Maintenance

6-cylinder Models

285

Canadian Owners

U.S. Owners

A, B, C

A

B

C



Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 336 ).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Replace air cleaner element (independent of time).Inspect drive belt.Replace dust and pollen filter.

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt, and inspect water pump.Inspect valve clearance (independent of

time).Replace spark plugs (independent of time).

Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace transmission fluid (A/T), thenreplace every 90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T).Do items in A, B, C.


60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.

7,500 mi/12,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr22,500 mi/36,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs37,500 mi/60,000 km3 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs52,500 mi/84,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs67,500 mi/108,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs82,500 mi/132,000 km6 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs97,500 mi/156,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

112,500 mi/180,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs9 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs



:275

NOTE:

274

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

－

－

＃＊＊

＃

＃

＃＊

＊

6-cylinder Models

Maintenance286




Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 monthsCheck oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Inspect every 105,000 miles (168,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km)

Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .


Lights and controlsvehicle underbody

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months


Replace engine oil and oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner element

Use normal schedule except in dustyconditions

Inspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pump

Inspect drive beltReplace engine coolantReplace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterLubricate all hinges, locks and latchesRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition atleast once per month)

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 4 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years

304824

152412

457236

7512060

10516884

9014472

Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years

609648

12019296

At

:1 :2 :

275332

330

M/TA/T

1

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

－－

□

□□□

□□□□□□□□□

□□

□□□□□□□□

＃＊

＃

＃

＊

＃

＊＊


6-cylinder Models

287

Canadian Owners

U.S. Owners

A, B, C, D

A

B

C

D

E



3,750 mi/6,000 km7,500 mi/12,000 km/6 mos11,250 mi/18,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr18,750 mi/30,000 km22,500 mi/36,000 km26,250 mi/42,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs33,750 mi/54,000 km37,500 mi/60,000 km41,250 mi/66,000 km3 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs48,750 mi/78,000 km52,500 mi/84,000 km56,250 mi/90,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs

63,750 mi/102,000 km

Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, C.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T).Replace timing belt.

Replace transmission fluid (A/T).Do items in A, B, C, D.Do item in A.

Replace engine oil and filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 336 ).Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Check parking brake adjustment.Replace air cleaner element (independent of time).Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches withmultipurpose grease.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Inspect drive belt.Replace air cleaner element (independent of time).Replace dust and pollen filter.Replace air cleaner element every 15,000 mi/24,000 km(independent of time), otherwise use normalconditions schedule.

274

1

2

See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special drivingconditions.

See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.



NOTE:

:

1 :2 :

332330

275

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

□□

□□□

□□□

□□

＃＊

＃＊

＊＊

♯

Maintenance

6-cylinder Models

288


See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.See dust and pollen filter on page for replacementinformation under special driving conditions.

NOTE:

1 :2 :

:275

332330

Do items in A, B.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Replace transmission fluid (A/T).

Do items in A, B, C, D.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.

Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump.Inspect valve clearance (independent of time).Replace spark plugs (independent of time).

Do items in A, B, C.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.

Replace transmission fluid (M/T).Replace timing belt .

Replace transmission fluid (A/T), then replaceevery 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs.Do items in A, B, C, D.


60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.

67,500 mi/108,000 km71,250 mi/114,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs78,750 mi/126,000 km82,500 mi/132,000 km86,250 mi/138,000 km6 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs

93,750 mi/150,000 km97,500 mi/156,000 km101,250 mi/162,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

108,750 mi/174,000 km112,500 mi/180,000 km116,250 mi/186,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs

9 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs

1

1

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

(lis

ted

by

dis

tance

/tim

e)



289

3,750 mi

7,500 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

22,500 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

37,500 mi

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

52,500 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

6,000 km

12,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km(or 1 year)

30,000 km

36,000 km

42,000 km


54,000 km

60,000 km

66,000 km


78,000 km

84,000 km

90,000 km


You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.286

284

Maintenance


290

63,750 mi

67,500 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

82,500 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

93,750 mi

97,500 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

112,500 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

102,000 km

108,000 km

114,000 km


126,000 km

132,000 km

138,000 km


150,000 km

156,000 km

162,000 km


174,000 km

180,000 km

186,000 km


－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Windshield washer fluid Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See pages

and .

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate lights monthly. Seepage .

228

230

306

307 308

313

333

340

Owner Maintenance Checks

Maintenance 291

4-cylinder Models

Fluid Locations

Maintenance292

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

RADIATOR CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

CLUTCH FLUID(5-speed ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

6-cylinder Models

Fluid Locations

Maintenance 293

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(Gray cap)(6-speed ManualTransmission only)

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and install theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Pour the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection.

Adding Oil Recommended Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance294

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder modelsENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’ You may use a synthetic motor oil if

it meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight as shownon the chart. When using syntheticoil, you must follow the oil and filterchange intervals given in themaintenance schedule.

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Honda, toimprove cold weather starting, andto help your engine use less fuel.

The oil’s viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.Select the oil for your car accordingto this chart.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance 295

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the car. The car shouldbe raised on a service station-typehydraulic lift for this service. Unlessyou have the knowledge and properequipment, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Your Honda does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

1.Changing the Oil and FilterAdditives

Engine Oil

Maintenance296

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourHonda dealer) is required toremove the filter.

Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the connectingsurface of a new oil filter.

4.3.2.

CONTINUED

Engine Oil

Maintenance 297

4-cylinder models

OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL DRAIN BOLTWASHER OIL FILTER

4-cylinder models6-cylinder models

WASHER

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

(4-cylinder models)

(6-cylinder models)

9.

8.

7.

6.

(4-cylinder models)

(6-cylinder models)

5.

Engine Oil

Maintenance298

OIL FILTER

6-cylinder models

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water. Itdoes not require any additionalmixing. If it is not available, you mayuse another major-brand non-silicatecoolant as a temporary replacement.Make sure it is a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in

corrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.The coolant you add should alwaysbe a mixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 299

6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly and carefullyso you do not spill. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled coolantcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

4.

5.

6.1.

2.

3.

Cooling System

Maintenance300

RESERVE TANK4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder modelsRADIATOR CAP

RADIATOR CAP

The cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useHonda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the car. Unlessyou have the tools and knowledge,you should have this maintenancedone by a skilled mechanic.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your car’s coolingsystem. They may not be compatiblewith the coolant or engine compo-nents.

Open the hood. Make sure theengine and radiator are cool to thetouch.

Turn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe temperature control dial all theway clockwise. Turn off theignition and remove the key.

1.

CONTINUED

On cars with Manual A/C

Replacing Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 301

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK

Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard. Drain the coolantinto an appropriate container.

Turn the ignition ON (II).Makesure the DUAL indicator is off.Turn the driver’s side temperaturecontrol dial to 90°F (32°C). Turnoff the ignition and remove thekey.

Remove the radiator cap.

3.

2.

On car with Climate Control System

Cooling System

Maintenance302

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models6-cylinder models

DRAIN PLUG DRAIN PLUG

Drain the coolant into anappropriate container.

Install a rubber hose on the drainbolt at the rear of the enginecylinder block. Loosen the drainbolt.

Remove the reserve tankmounting bolt with a wrench.

Remove the reserve tank from itsholder by pulling it straight up.Drain the coolant into anappropriate container, then put thetank back in its holder. Install themounting bolt securely.

5.4. 6.

CONTINUED

6-cylinder models only

Cooling System

Maintenance 303

HOLDERS

RESERVETANK CAP

MOUNTINGBOLT

RESERVETANK

HOLDERS6-cylinder models

RESERVETANK CAP

4-cylinder models

MOUNTINGBOLT

DRAIN BOLTRUBBER HOSE

RESERVE TANK

Pour Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2 intothe radiator up to the base of thefiller neck. This coolant is amixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Pre-mixingis not required.

When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug at thebottom of the radiator.

Tighten the drain bolt at the rearof the engine cylinder blocksecurely.

Tightening torque:

7.

9.

8. 6-cylinder models only

Cooling System

Maintenance304

4-cylinder models

FILLER NECK

Fill up to here

FILLER NECK

Fill up to here6-cylinder models

7 lbf·ft (9.8 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)

The cooling system capacity is: Start the engine and let it run forabout 30 seconds. Then turn offthe engine.

Fill the radiator with coolant up tothe base of the filler neck.

Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator cooling fan comes onat least twice. Then stop theengine.

Remove the radiator cap. Pourcoolant into the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck and into thereserve tank up to the MAX mark.

Start the engine and hold it at1,500 rpm until the cooling fancomes on. Turn off the engine.Check the coolant level in theradiator and add coolant if needed.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

If necessary, fill the reserve tankto the MAX mark. Install thereserve tank cap.

16.

17.

18.

15.

14.

13.

12.

10.

11.With automatic transmission:

With 5-speed manual transmission:

With 6-speed manual transmission:

With automatic transmission:

Cooling System

Maintenance

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

305

1.37 US gal (5.2 )

1.40 US gal (5.3 )

1.77 US gal (6.7 )

1.74 US gal (6.6 )

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal usage. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel.

Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

The low washer level indicator willlight when the level is low (see page

).

The windshield washer reservoir islocated behind the right headlight.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

67

On Canadian models

Windshield Washers

Maintenance306

LEVEL GAUGE


LEVEL GAUGE

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint,while a vinegar/water solution candamage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer f luid.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Park the car on level ground. Shutoff the engine.

Make sure the notch in the rubbercap fits in the dipstick guide andthat you push the dipstick in allthe way.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipsticktube to bring it to the upper mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled fluidcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit is not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.4-cylinder models

CONTINUED


Transmission Fluid

Maintenance 307

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

DIPSTICKGUIDE

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive thevehicle a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your Honda dealer.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the car on level ground. Shutoff the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Make sure the notch fits in thedipstick guide and the dipstick isdown all the way.

Make sure the rubber cap on thedipstick fits in the dipstick guideand that you push the dipstick inall the way.

1.

2.

6.

3.

6-cylinder modelsAutomatic Transmission

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance308

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive thevehicle a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.Make sure the rubber cap fits inthe dipstick guide and the dipstickis down all the way.


If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your Honda dealer.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug and addfluid to bring it to the upper mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled fluidcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit is not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

5.

6.

4.

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance 309

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the car sitting onlevel ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda Manual Transmis-sion Fluid (MTF) until it starts torun out of the hole. Reinstall the

filler bolt and tighten it securely.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.


On 4-cylinder models


Transmission Fluid

Maintenance310

FILLER BOLT

Correct level

CONTINUED

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground.

Remove the check bolt and look fortransmission fluid coming out of thebolt hole. If a small amount of fluiddrips out of the bolt hole, reinstallthe check bolt.

If no fluid comes out, remove thefiller bolt. Slowly add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the check bolthole. Let the fluid run out until itstops, then reinstall the check boltand the filler bolt.

On EX-V6 model6-speed Manual Transmission

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance 311

WASHER

DRAIN BOLT

CHECK BOLT FILLER BOLT

WASHER

Pour the fluid to the filler hole slowlyand carefully so you do not spill.Clean up any spills immediately.Spilled fluid could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.


If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your Honda dealer.

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance312

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement. However, the use ofany non-Honda brake fluid can causecorrosion and decrease the life of thesystem. Have the brake systemflushed and refilled with HondaHeavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 assoon as possible.

Check the fluid level in the reser-voirs monthly. There are up to tworeservoirs, depending on the model.They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time recommenda-tion in the maintenance schedule.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled fluid coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your car’s brakingsystem and can cause extensivedamage.

Brake System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance 313

MAX

MIN

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Maintenance

Clutch System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

314

MAX

MIN

Check the level when the engine iscold. Look at the side of thereservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. If it is not available, you mayuse another power steering fluid asan emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled fluid coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Maintenance

Power Steering

315

6-cylider models

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL4-cylider models LOWER LEVEL

UPPER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the driver’sside of the engine compartment.To replace it:

Loosen the four bolts, and removethe air cleaner housing cover.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, and tighten the four bolts.

The air cleaner element should bereplaced according to the distancerecommendation in the maintenanceschedule.

1.

3.

4.

5.

2.

Maintenance

Replacement

Air Cleaner Element

4-cylinder Models

316

BOLTS

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, and tighten the four bolts.

To replace it:

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the driver’sside of the engine compartment.

Loosen the four bolts, and removethe air cleaner housing cover.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

1.

3.

4.

5.2.

Maintenance

Air Cleaner Element

Replacement6-cylinder Models

317

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

BOLTS

Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts (as shown),including the pivot. Follow the timeand distance recommendations inthe Maintenance Schedule. If youare not sure how to clean and greasethe latch, contact your Honda dealer.

Remove the four nuts with awrench, then remove the coilcover.

The spark plugs in your car are aspecial iridium-tipped design forlonger life. The spark plugs shouldbe replaced according to the distancerecommendation in the maintenanceschedule.

1.

ReplacementSpark PlugsHood Latch(4-cylinder Models)

Hood Latch, Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models)

Maintenance318

PIVOTS NUTS

COIL COVERLATCH ASSEMBLY

NUTS

Clean up any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

Use a wrench to remove the boltholding the ignition coil. Pull theignition coil up slightly.

Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

Remove the ignition coil.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Put the new spark plug into thesocket, then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

5.2.

4.

3.6.

7.

8.

CONTINUED

Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models)

Maintenance 319

CONNECTOR

IGNITION COIL

LOCK TAB

BOLT

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

Install the ignition coil into thehole.

Connect the wire connector to theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

Push the ignition coil down all theway. Install the bolt.

Repeat this procedure for theother three spark plugs.

Reinstall the coil cover, andtighten the four nuts.

9.NGK:DENSO:

12.

13.

11.

10.

Maintenance


Specifications:

320

IZFR6K-11SKJ20DR-M11Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. A

spark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

CONTINUED

Clean off any dirt and oil that hascollected around the ignition coil.

Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

Loosen the two holding clips byturning the heads one-quarter turncounterclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver. Remove the cover onthe front cylinder bank by pullingit straight up.

The spark plugs in your car are aspecial iridium-tipped design forlonger life. The spark plugs shouldbe replaced according to the distancerecommendation in the maintenanceschedule.

1. 2.

3.


Maintenance

Replacement

321

CONNECTOR

HOLDING CLIP IGNITION COIL

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Put the new spark plug into thesocket, then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

Use a wrench to remove thehexagon socket head cap boltholding the ignition coil. Removethe ignition coil by pulling itstraight out.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

6. 7.4.

5.


Maintenance322

HEXAGON SOCKET HEAD CAP BOLT

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

Install the ignition coil. Reinstallthe hexagon socket head cap bolt.

Push the wire connector onto theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

Repeat this procedure for theother five spark plugs.

Reinstall the cover on the frontcylinder bank while putting itsmounting clip in the hole on thepassenger’s side. Secure the coverby turning the heads of the twoholding clips one-quarter turnclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver.

NGK:DENSO:

8.

9.

10.

11.

Specifications:


Maintenance 323

IZFR6K-11SKJ20DR-M11

Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

Check the condition of your car’sbattery monthly. You should checkthe color of the test indicator window,and for corrosion on the terminals.

Battery

Maintenance324

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW


TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

－

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the car’selectrical system.

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative ( ) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

CONTINUED

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

Battery

Maintenance 325


If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the AUTO feature ofthe driver’s window will be disabled.You should reset the AUTO feature(see page ).105

Battery

Maintenance326

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourcar’s electronic controls. Detach thebattery cables bef ore connecting thebattery to a charger.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

To replace the blade:

Raise the driver’s side first, thenthe passenger’s side.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 327

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the arms.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the passenger’s side first,then the driver’s side.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance328

BLADE

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

Your car’s air conditioning is a sealedsystem. Any major maintenance,such as recharging, should be doneby a qualified mechanic. You can doa couple of things to make sure theair conditioning works efficiently.

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications onpages and .)396 398

Air Conditioning System

Maintenance 329

AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicef acility uses a ref rigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures theref rigerant f or reuse. Releasingref rigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

The condenser and radiator f ins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor sof t-bristle brush to clean them.

The dust and pollen filter is locatedbehind the glove box.

Open the glove box.

To replace it:

Push the stop on the right side ofthe glove box to detach it from theglove box.

Pivot the glove box out of the way.

The dust and pollen filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) undernormal conditions. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry anddiesel-powered vehicles. Replace itmore often if air flow from theheating and cooling system/climatecontrol system becomes less thanusual.

1.

3.

2.

Dust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance

Replacement

330

STOP

Push in the tabs on the corners ofthe dust and pollen filter case. Pullout the case.

Remove the filter from the case.

Install the new filter in the case.Make sure the arrows of the ‘‘AIRFLOW’’ marks on the filter pointto the air flow direction(downward).

Install the case. Make sure bothtabs ‘‘click’’ into place.

Install the glove box stop, andclose the glove box.

If you are not sure how to replacethe dust and pollen filter, have itreplaced by your Honda dealer.

5.

6.

7.

8.

4.

Dust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance 331

－－

An auto-tensioner adjusts the tensionof the drive belt. The pointer on theauto-tensioner should be in theproper range. It should be checkedaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in themaintenance schedule.

Check the condition of the drive belt.Examine the edges of the belt forcracks or fraying.

The timing belt should normally bereplaced at the intervals shown inthe maintenance schedule.

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Replace these belts at 60,000 miles(U.S.) or 100,000 km (Canada) if youregularly drive your car in one ormore of these conditions:

If the pointer is out of this range oryou see signs of wear, have the drivebelt replaced by your Honda dealeras soon as possible.

6-cylinder models onlyTiming BeltDrive Belt

Maintenance

Drive Belt, Timing Belt

332

POINTER

Proper range


POINTER

Properrange

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the carhas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive the carbefore checking the tire pressure,the tires can still be considered‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile(1.6 km).

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make your carride more harshly, are more prone todamage from road hazards, and wearunevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

To safely operate your car, your tiresmust be the proper type and size, ingood condition with adequate tread,and correctly inflated. The followingpages give more detailed informationon how and when to check airpressure, how to inspect your tiresfor damage and wear, and what to dowhen your tires need to be replaced.

Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on page .334

CONTINUED

Inflation

Tires

Maintenance 333

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot [the car has been drivenseveral miles (kilometers)], you willsee readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa,0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than thecold reading. This is normal. Do notlet air out to match the specified coldpressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds. Tire pressures for highspeed driving are the same as fornormal driving.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold air pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional technical informationabout your tires, see page .

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

400

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

EX-V6 with M/TEX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with A/T1

2

All models

4-cylinder LX model

All models except 4-cylinder LX

Tires

Maintenance

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

334

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P205/60R16 91VP215/50R17 93V

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )29 psi (200 kPa ,2.0 kgf/cm )

P205/65R15 92H30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa ,2.0 kgf/cm )

1

2

1

2

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair.

Your car’s tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

CONTINUED

Inspection Maintenance

Tires

Maintenance 335

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your car’soriginal tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare ‘‘directional.’’ This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,they should be rotated only front-to-back.

The tires that came with your carwere selected to match the perform-ance capabilities of the car whileproviding the best combination ofhandling, ride comfort, and long life.You should replace them with radialtires of the same size, load range,speed rating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall). Mixing radial andbias-ply tires on your car can reduceits braking ability, traction, andsteering accuracy.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every10,000 miles (16,000 km) on4-cylinder models and 7,500 miles(12,000 km) on 6-cylinder models.Move the tires to the positionsshown in the chart each time theyare rotated.


Tire Rotation

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

Maintenance336

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Front

Improper wheel weights can damageyour car’s aluminum wheels. Use onlyHonda wheel weights f or balancing.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your car’s handling.

Tires:The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the car. Tire size andconstruction can affect wheel speedand may cause the system to workinconsistently.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheelthat came on your car. Replacementwheels are available at your Hondadealer.

Wheels:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading.

400

LX model

LX model

EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with A/T models

EX-V6 with M/T model

EX-V6 with M/T model

EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with A/T models

Tires

Maintenance

Wheels and Tires

337

15 x 6 1/2 JJ

16 x 6 1/2 JJ

17 x 7 JJ

P205/65R15 92H

P205/60R16 91V

P215/50R17 93V

Installing improper tires on yourcar can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

＋Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourHonda, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour car’s handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your car’soriginal equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommenda-tions.

Mount snow chains on your tireswhen required by driving conditionsor local laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your car has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

Winter Driving Snow Tires Tire Chains

Tires

Maintenance338

If you ever hear the chainscontacting the body or chassis, stopand investigate. If the chains haveloosened, retighten them. Make surethey do not contact the brake linesor suspension.

Remove the chains as soon as youbegin driving on cleared roads.

Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134Cable-types: SCC Radial ChainCH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030

The chains listed here are availableat many auto supply stores. For acomplete list of stores, visit the SCCwebsite at www.scc-chain.com.When installing chains, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with chains installed.

These chains are the only ones thathave been approved by Honda foruse on your car. Since Honda cannottest all chains, you must bepersonally responsible for properselection, installation, and use ofsnow chains.

Cable-types: SCC Radial ChainCH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030

CH2412T

LX

EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with automatictransmission

EX-V6 with manual transmission

Tires

Maintenance 339

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Check the operation of your car’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourcar’s visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

Lights

Maintenance340

LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT

TURN SIGNAL/PARKING/SIDE MARKER LIGHT

Check the following:

Headlights (low and high beam)Parking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsHigh-mount brake lightTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightsSide marker lightsDaytime running lights(Canadian models)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on pages and

to determine what type ofreplacement bulb is needed.

397399

Lights

Maintenance 341

TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

BACK-UP LIGHTSTOP/TAILLIGHT/SIDE MARKER LIGHT

LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS

HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your car was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustment of theheadlights should be performed by aHonda technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Your car has two bulbs on each side,four in total. Make sure you arereplacing the bulb that is burned out.Your car uses halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Open the hood. If you need tochange a bulb on the passenger’sside, undo the two fasteners andremove the air intake cover.

1.

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance

High Beam Headlight

342

4-cylinder models

FASTENERS AIR INTAKECOVER

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

CONTINUED

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

3.

2.

4.

5.

Lights

Maintenance 343

6-cylinder models

AIR INTAKECOVER

FASTENERS

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder modelsTAB BULB TABBULB

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

If you are changing the bulb onthe passenger’s side, start theengine, turn the steering wheel allthe way to the left, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the driver’s side, turn thesteering wheel to the right.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

(Passenger’s side)Reinstall the air intake cover.Reinstall the two fasteners andsecure them by pushing on theheads until they lock.

3.

1.

2.6.

7.

Lights

Maintenance

Low Beam Headlight

344

HOLDING CLIPS

Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Reinstall the air intake ductsecurely.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the two holding clips. Lockeach one in place by pushing onthe center.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

If you need to change the lowbeam headlight bulb on the driver’sside, remove the air intake duct.You can reach the air intake ductfrom the back side of the innerfender.

6.

5.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

4.

On EX-V6 model with manualtransmission

On EX-V6 model with manualtransmission

Maintenance

Lights

345

AIR INTAKE DUCT

EX-V6 with M/T

If you are changing the bulb onthe passenger’s side, start theengine, turn the steering wheel allthe way to the left, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the driver’s side, turn thesteering wheel to the right.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

1.

3.2.

4.

Maintenance

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/Parking/Side Marker Light Bulb

346

HOLDING CLIPS

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pushing it in andturning the bulb counterclockwiseuntil it unlocks.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the holding clips. Lock eachone in place by pushing on thecenter.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Maintenance 347

Open the trunk.

Remove the light assembly coverby pulling its outside edge.

Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: stop/taillight/side marker, back-up or turnsignal.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.


Install the light assembly cover.Make sure it snaps into place.

1.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Rear Bulbs

348

COVER

Open the trunk.

Carefully bend back the corner ofthe trunk lid trim to expose thebulbs.

Remove the six trim clips from thetrunk lid trim by carefully pryingthem using a small, flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by squeezing the tabs onboth sides of the socket.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

Reinstall the socket back in placeby pushing it in until it latches.

Reinstall the trunk lid trim. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk lid seal.

Put each trim clip in the hole onthe trunk lid trim and push on thecenter until it locks (the center isflush with the head).1.

2.

7.

8.

3.

4.

5.

6.

6-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

349

TRIM CLIPS

Open the trunk and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.Install the new bulb in the socket.

Reinstall the socket. Turn it clock-wise until it locks.


1.

2.

3.

4.

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance350

BULBSOCKET

CONTINUED

The ceiling light, spotlight, door lightand vanity mirror light come apartthe same way, but they do not usethe same type of bulb.

Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

Door light:Pry on the top left or right of thelens.

Ceiling light:Pry on the front edge of the lensnear both sides.

Spotlights:Pry on the inner edge of bothspotlights.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Carefully snap the lens backin place.

1.

2.

3.

On LX and LX-V6 models


Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorLights

351

CEILING LIGHT

BULB

SPOTLIGHTS

BULBS

SPOTLIGHTS

BULBS

Lights

Maintenance352

BULB

BULBS

DOOR COURTESY LIGHT VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS

Open the trunk.Put a cloth on the right side edgeof the trunk light assembly.Remove the trunk light assemblyby using a small flat-tippedscrewdriver to pry carefully on theright edge of the assembly.

Pull the bulb straight out of theholder. Push the new bulb straightinto the holder until it bottoms.

Put the light assembly back intothe hole, left side first. Push onthe right side until it snaps intoplace.

1.

2.

3.

Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb

Maintenance

Lights

353

TRUNK LIGHT

BULB

Block the rear wheels.

Fill the fuel tank.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

If you need to park your car for anextended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your car back on the road. Ifpossible, store your car indoors.

If the car is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe car is being stored indoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

Cover the car with a ‘‘breathable’’cover, one made from a porousmaterial such as cotton.Nonporous materials, such asplastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply a carbody wax to the painted surfacesthat mate with the door and trunkseals.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page ).

If you store your car for 12 monthsor longer, have your Honda dealerperform the inspections called for inthe 24 months maintenance schedule(Normal Conditions) as soon as youtake it out of storage (see page ).The replacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the car has actuallyreached that time or mileage.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

296

274

Maintenance

Storing Your Car

354

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives youinformation on how to clean your carand preserve its appearance: thepaint, brightwork, wheels andinterior. Also included are severalthings you can do to help preventcorrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 356.....................................Washing . 356

.......................................Waxing . 357....................Aluminum Wheels . 357

..........................Paint Touch-up . 357..................................Interior Care . 358...................................Carpeting . 358.................................Floor Mats . 358

.........................................Fabric . 359...........................................Vinyl . 359

.......................................Leather . 359...................................Seat Belts . 359....................................Windows . 360

..........................Air Fresheners . 360....................Corrosion Protection . 361

.................................Body Repairs . 362

Appearance Care

Appearance Care 355

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for car washing.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner’sManual.

Frequent washing helps preserveyour car’s beauty. Dirt and grit canscratch the paint, while tree sap andbird droppings can permanently ruinthe finish.

Wash your car in a shady area, not indirect sunlight. If the car is parked inthe sun, move it into the shade andlet the exterior cool down before youstart.

Rinse the car thoroughly with coolwater to remove loose dirt.

As you dry the car, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).

Wash the car using the water anddetergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe car does not need waxing.

357

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

356

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your car.

－

－

Always wash and dry the whole carbefore waxing it. You should waxyour car, including the metal trim,whenever water sits on the surfacein large patches. It should form intobeads or droplets after waxing.

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Hondawhen it is new.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. You

should use a polish on your Honda ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the car does notneed waxing.

Clean your Honda’s aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners or stiffbrushes, can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your car’s color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver’s doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Inspect your car frequently for chipsor scratches in the paint. Repairthem right away to prevent corrosionof the metal underneath. Use thetouch-up paint only on small chipsand scratches. More extensive paintdamage should be repaired by aprofessional.

EX and EX-V6 models

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing

Aluminum Wheels

Paint Touch-up

357

Vacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

If you replace it, use a Honda floormat that is designed to be used withthe floor mat anchors in your car.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat inthe driver’s footwell, make sure itfits properly and that it can be usedwith the floor mat anchor.

Do not put additional floor mats ontop of the anchored mat, otherwisethe additional mats may slideforward and interfere with the pedals.

The Honda driver’s floor mat thatcame with your car was designed tobe hooked over the floor matanchors. This keeps the floor matfrom sliding forward and possiblyinterfering with the pedals.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your car.

Carpeting Floor Mats

Interior Care

Appearance Care358

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the car.

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

CONTINUED

On EX with leather interior and EX-V6models

Fabric

Vinyl

Leather Seat Belts

Interior Care

Appearance Care 359

LOOP

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of your car,it is best to use a solid type. Someliquid air fresheners contain chemi-cals that may cause parts of theinterior trim and fabric to crack ordiscolor.

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Interior Care

Appearance Care

Windows Air Fresheners

360

The rear window def ogger andantenna wires are bonded to the insideof the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-down can dislodge and break thesewires. When cleaning the rear window,use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your car:

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thecar stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the car.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Honda. You canhelp keep your car from corrodingby performing some simple periodicmaintenance:

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourcar inspected and repairedperiodically.

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your car. This isespecially important in areas thatuse road salt in winter. It is also agood idea in humid climates andareas subject to salt air. Be carefulnot to damage the ABS wheelsensors and wiring at each wheel.

1.

2.

Appearance Care

Corrosion Protection

361

Body repairs can affect your car’sresistance to corrosion. If your carneeds repairs after a collision, payclose attention to the parts used inthe repair and the quality of thework.

Make sure the repair facility usesHonda replacement body parts.Some companies make sheet metalpieces that seem to duplicate theoriginal Honda body parts, but areactually inferior in fit, finish, andcorrosion resistance. Once installed,they do not give the same high-quality appearance.

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant Honda parts used in the repair.Although most insurers recognizethe quality of original parts, somemay try to specify that the repairs bedone with other available parts. Youshould investigate this before anyrepairs have begun.

Take your car to your authorizedHonda dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care362

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their cars. It givesyou information about how to safelyevaluate the problem and what to doto correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your car towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 364....................Changing a Flat Tire . 365

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 371Nothing Happens or the

Starter Motor Operates........................Very Slowly . 371

The Starter Operates................................Normally . 372................................Jump Starting . 373

............If Your Engine Overheats . 376.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 379..........Charging System Indicator . 380

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 381.......................Readiness Codes . 382

...............Brake System Indicator . 383..................Closing the Moonroof . 384

..............................................Fuses . 386..........Checking and Replacing . 386

......................Emergency Towing . 391

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected 363

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Your car has a compact spare tirethat takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put it backon your car as soon as you can.

Turn off the Traction ControlSystem (see page ). Drivingwith the compact spare tire mayactivate the TCS.

The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour car. Do not use your sparetire on another car unless it is thesame make and model.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

259

On all V6 models

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected364

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool kit out of the trunk.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitchthe trailer.

Park the car on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark (automatic) or Reverse(manual). Apply the parking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the car whileyou change the tire.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire


TRUNK FLOOR

SPARE TIRE JACKTOOL KIT

The car can easily roll off thejack, seriously injuring anyoneunderneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the car when itis supported only by the jack.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel wrench.

The jack is behind a cover in theright fender. Remove the cover byturning the handle counterclock-wise, then pulling on the cover.

6. 7. 8.



366

JACK WHEEL WRENCH

WHEEL NUT

CONTINUED

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise the caruntil the flat tire is off the ground.

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. Placethe jack under the jacking point.Turn the end bracket clockwiseuntil the top of the jack contactsthe jacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Temporarilyplace the flat tire on the groundwith the outside surface of thewheel facing up. You could scratchthe wheel if you put it face down.

9. 10. 11.



JACKING POINT WHEEL WRENCH EXTENSION

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriver orother tool. The wheel cover cannotbe removed without first removingthe wheel nuts.

12. 13.On LX and LX-V6 models



368

WHEEL COVER

WHEEL NUTS HUB

CONTINUED

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Lower the car to the ground andremove the jack.

15. 16.14. EX and EX-V6 models



80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

Lower the trunk floor, then closethe trunk lid.

17.

19.

18.

22.

20. 21.



370

SPACER CONE

WING BOLT

Forsparetire

Fornormaltire

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or Neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (See

on page .)

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the car froma booster battery (see page ).

373

391

373

324

CONTINUED

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

If Your Engine Won’t Start


In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Your car has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page ).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

386

391

83

241

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

If Your Engine Won’t Start


Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page ). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

To jump start your car, follow thesedirections closely:

If your car’s battery has run down,you may be able to start the engineby using a booster battery. Althoughthis seems like a simple procedure,you should take several precautions.

You cannot start a Honda with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.

1.

2.

324

CONTINUED

Jump Starting


A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

－＋

＋

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourHonda’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

3. 4.

Jump Starting


4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models

Once your car is running, discon-nect the negative cable from yourcar, then from the booster battery.Disconnect the positive cable fromyour car, then the booster battery.

The numbers in the illustrationsshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

Start your car. If the starter motorstill operates slowly, check thejumper cable connections to makesure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle. Keep the ends of the jumper

cables away from each other andany metal on the vehicle until allare disconnected. Otherwise, youmay cause an electrical short.

7.

6.

5.

Jump Starting


6-cylinder models 4-cylinder modelsBOOSTERBATTERY 6-cylinder models

BOOSTERBATTERY

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

The pointer of your car’s tempera-ture gauge should stay in the mid-range under most conditions. It maygo higher if you are driving up a longsteep hill on a very hot day. If itclimbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Your car can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.Turn off the heating and cooling/climate control system and allother accessories. Turn on thehazard warning indicators.

1.

2.

If Your Engine Overheats


Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point, then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below theMIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

230

391

CONTINUED


EmergencyTowing


Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toAUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See

on page .)

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

9. 11.

12.

10.

391



EmergencyTowing

378

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Let the car sit for a minute. Openthe hood and check the oil level(see page ). Although oil leveland oil pressure are not directlyconnected, an engine that is verylow on oil can lose pressure duringcornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See

on page .)1.

2.

3.

4.

228

294

391

Low Oil Pressure Indicator


EmergencyTowing

379

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe car stopped.

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, heater, A/C,climate control, rear defogger, cruisecontrol, etc. Try not to use otherelectrically-operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning and take extra care not tostall it. Starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.


Charging System Indicator

380

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, it indicates one ofthe engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour car’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeyour car to put out excessiveemissions. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourcar, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes one driving trip.

If the indicator remains on past onedriving trip, or the fuel cap was notloose or missing, have the carchecked by the dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your car if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

This indicator may also come onalong with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your car’s emissions controlsand engine. Those repairs may not becovered by your car’s warranties.

Your car has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your car’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your car for astate emissions test until thereadiness codes are set. Refer toState Emissions Testing for moreinformation. (See page .)

To check if they are set, turn theignition ON (II), but do not start theengine. The Malfunction IndicatorLamp will come on for 20 seconds. Ifit then goes off, the readiness codesare set. If it blinks 5 times, thereadiness codes are not set.

408

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


Readiness Codes

382

＊

＊

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the car’sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page ). If thefluid level is low, take the car to yourdealer and have the brake systeminspected for leaks or worn brakepads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system’s dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before the carbegins to slow down, and you willhave to press harder on the pedal.The distance needed to stop will bemuch longer.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the car. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See

on page .)

The Brake System Indicatornormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to check the parking brake.It comes on and stays lit if you do notfully release the parking brake.

If you must drive the car a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

If the ABS indicator comes on withthis indicator, have the car inspectedby your Honda dealer immediately.

313391

EmergencyTowing

Brake System Indicator


BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

U.S. indicator shown

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually. To remove the round plug in the

center of the headliner, turn theplug by using a screwdriver orcoin, then pry it out. Make sure toalign the tabs on the round plug tothe notches on the ceilling asshown in the illustration.

Insert the moonroof wrenchsecurely into the socket behindthis plug. Hold the longer handleas shown and turn the wrenchslowly until the moonroof is fullyclosed.

5.4.

3.

1.

2.

390


Closing the Moonroof


SOCKET

ROUND PLUG

TAB

NOTCH

Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.

If you need to close the moonroofmanually, it means your car’smoonroof opening/closing functionis developing a problem. Have yourcar checked by a Honda dealer.

6.

Closing the Moonroof


All the electrical circuits in your carhave fuses to protect them from ashort circuit or overload. Thesefuses are located in two fuse boxes.

The under-hood fuse box is locatednear the back of the engine compart-ment on the driver’s side. To open it,push the tabs as shown.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

If something electrical in your carstops working, the first thing youshould check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check the component’soperation.

The interior fuse box is on thedriver’s lower left side. To removethe fuse box lid, put your finger inthe notch on the lid, and pull itupward slightly, then pull it towardyou and take it out of its hinges.

1.

2.

390389

Fuses


Checking and Replacing Fuses

386

INTERIOR

UNDER-HOOD

TAB

NOTCH

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the side windowat the wire inside. Removing thesefuses requires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

3. 4.

CONTINUED

Fuses


BLOWN BLOWN FUSE PULLER

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If you cannot drive the car withoutfixing the problem, and you do nothave a spare fuse, take a fuse of thesame rating or a lower rating fromone of the other circuits. Make sureyou can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your car.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your car checkedby a qualified mechanic.

5.

6.

Fuses


BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment f use with the proper rating f or thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

－

－

＊

＊

＊

＋

＊

Amps.Amps. No.No.

Amps.No.

CONTINUED

Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

: 6-cylinder models

10 A7.5 A15 A20 A

10 A(30A)10 A15 A10 A

6789

10

12345

20 A30 A7.5 A20 A40 A40 A15 A30 A30 A20 A40 A40 A

(40 A)40 A

100 A

50 A50 A

111112131415161717181819202122

23Left Headlight Low Beam(Rear Defroster Coil)Left Headlight High BeamSmall LightRight Headlight High Beam

Right Headlight Low BeamBack UpFI ECUCondenser fanNot Used

Cooling FanCooling FanMG. ClutchHorn, StopRear DefrosterBack Up, ACCHazardABS MotorTCS MotorABS F/STCSOptionOptionHeater MotorBatteryNot Used

B IG1 MainPower Window Main

Fuses


UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

－

－

－

＊

－

－

－－

＊

No.

No. No. Amps.Amps. Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected

Amps. Circuits Protected

: On Canadian models

131415161718192021222324252627282930313233

123456

789

101112

10 A20 A15 A7.5 A30 A

(15 A)15 A

(10 A)15 A10 A7.5 A

Back-Up LightsDoor LockFront Accessory SocketsIG OPDSIG WiperNot Used

DBWIgnition CoilDaytime Running LightLaf HeaterRadioInterior Light

(20 A)(20 A)(20 A)

15 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A

20 A20 A

(20 A)

7.5 A

7.5 A7.5 A

Not UsedDriver’s Power Seat SlidingHeated Seats

Not UsedIG ACGIG Fuel PumpIG WasherIG MeterIG SRSIGP (PGM-FI ECU)Not UsedNot UsedPassenger’s Power WindowDriver’s Power WindowMoonroofNot UsedIG HACNot UsedACCHAC OP

Driver’s Power Seat Reclining

Fuses


INTERIOR FUSE BOX

－

－

－

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

The operatorloads your car on the back of a truck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andthe cables lift that end of the car offthe ground. Your car’s suspensionand body can be seriously damaged.

If your Honda cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If due todamage, your car must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to Neutral.

If your car needs to be towed, call aprofessional towing service or, if youbelong to one, an organization thatprovides roadside assistance. Nevertow your car behind another vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Turn off the engine.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the car no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If your car is equipped with a frontspoiler, remove it before towing so itis not damaged.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

CONTINUED

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

This is the best way to transportyour Honda.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourHonda.

This method of towing isunacceptable.

Emergency Towing


Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourcar must be transported with the f rontwheels of f the ground.

If you decide to tow your car with allfour wheels on the ground, makesure you use a properly-designed andattached tow bar. Prepare the car fortowing as described above, and leavethe ignition switch in Accessory (I)so the steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersocket are turned off so they do notrun down the battery.

Emergency Towing


The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

Trying to lif t or tow your car by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the car’s weight.

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Honda, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your car’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 394Specifications

..................(4-cylinder Models) . 396Specifications

..................(6-cylinder Models) . 398DOT Tire Quality Grading

............................(U. S. Cars) . 400.................................Treadwear . 400

......................................Traction . 400.............................Temperature . 401...........................Tire Information . 402

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 403......Driving in Foreign Countries . 404

.......................Emissions Controls . 405.....................The Clean Air Act . 405

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 405

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 405

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 405

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 406....................PGM-FI System . 406

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 406

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 406

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 406

....................Replacement Parts . 406..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 407

..............State Emissions Testing . 408

Technical Information

Technical Information 393

Your car has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourcar for warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour car. The easiest place to findthe VIN is on a plate fastened to thetop of the dashboard. You can see itby looking through the windshieldon the driver’s side. It is also on theCertification label attached to thedriver’s doorjamb, and is stamped onthe engine compartment bulkhead.The VIN is also provided in bar codeon the Certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information394

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

Identif ication Numbers


AUTOMATIC/MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER6-cylinder Models

MANUALTRANSMISSIONNUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

4-cylinder ModelsAUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊


Specifications (4-cylinder Models)

396

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

187.6 in (4,766 mm)71.3 in (1,810 mm)55.7 in (1,415 mm)105.1 in (2,670 mm)61.1 in (1,553 mm)61.2 in (1,554 mm)

1.88 US gal (7.1 )1.90 US gal (7.2 )

1.37 US gal (5.2 )1.40 US gal (5.3 )

5.6 US qt (5.3 )HFC-134a (R-134a)

17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

ND-OIL8 2.0 US qt (1.9 )2.2 US qt (2.1 )3.0 US qt (2.8 )6.9 US qt (6.5 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:0.16 US gal (0.6 )Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

Manual trans-mission fluidAutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

FrontRear

Approx.

1 :

2 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotalChangeTotal

U.S. CarsCanada Cars

1

2

－

－－－

－－－－－－－－－－

－－

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊



397

Battery

Fuses

Lights Engine

Alignment

Tires

12 V

12 V

24/2.2 CP

12 V12 V

60 W (HB3)51 W (HB4)

12 V

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V

12 V

21 W21/5 W18 W3 CP8 W21 W5 W2 CP1.1 W8 W

Capacity 12 V12 V

38 AH/5 HR47 AH/20 HR

Interior

Under-hood

Headlights

Front turn signal/parking/sidemarker lightsRear turn signal lights

Back-up lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightHigh-mount brake lightTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightsSpotlights

See page 390 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox lid.See page 389 or the fuse boxcover.

Water cooled 4-stroke i-VTEC4-cylinder gasoline engine

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)144 cu-in (2,354 cm )

9.7 : 1See spark plug maintenance sec-tion page 320 .

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°1°

3°15’

Size

Pressure

P205/65R15 92HP205/60R16 91V

T135/90D15 100M30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

1 : LX2 : EX

Front/Rear

SpareFront

Rear

Spare

Stop/taillight/side marker lights

1

2

1

2

1

2

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊



398

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

ManualtransmissionfluidAutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

61.1 in (1,553 mm)61.2 in (1,554 mm)

17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)HFC-134a (R-134a)

ND-OIL8

2.6 US qt (2.5 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )

7.6 US qt (7.2 )3.1 US qt (2.9 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

0.16 US gal (0.6 )

1.77 US gal (6.7 )

2.22 US gal (8.4 )

105.1 in (2,670 mm) 1.74 US gal (6.6 )

187.6 in (4,766 mm)71.3 in (1,810 mm)55.7 in (1,415 mm)

2.17 US gal (8.2 )

2.3 US qt (2.2 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

FrontRear

Approx.

1 :

2 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

U.S. CarsCanada Cars

1

2

－

＊＊

－－－

－－－－－－－－－－

－－＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊



399

Engine

Alignment

Lights

Battery

Fuses

Tires

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC

6-cylinder gasoline engine

Headlights

Front turn signal/parking/sidemarker lightsRear turn signal lights

Back-up lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightHigh-mount brake lightTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightsSpotlights

Capacity

Interior

Under-hood

Size

Pressure

12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V

63 W (HB3)51 W (HB4)24/2.2 CP

21 W21/5 W18 W3 CP8 W21 W5 W2 CP1.1 W8 W

52 AH/5 HR65 AH/20 HR

3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)183 cu-in (2,997 cm )

10.0 : 1

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°1°

3°15’

P215/50R17 93VP205/60R16 91V

T135/90D15 100M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )T135/80R16 101MSee page 390 or the fuse label

attached to the inside of the fusebox lid.See page 389 or the fuse boxcover. 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

See spark plug maintenance sec-tion page 323 .

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

1 :2 :

LX-V6, EX-V6 with automatic transmissionEX-V6 with manual transmission

Front/Rear

Spare

FrontRear

Spare

Stop/taillight/side marker lights

1

2

1

2

1

2

－The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according to Department ofTransportation (DOT) standards.The following explains thesegradings.

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)


－ Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Temperature A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)


－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－The tires that came on your car havea number of markings. Those youshould be aware of are describedbelow.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampletire size with an explanation of whateach component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Rim diameter in inches.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire Identification Number (TIN) isa group of numbers and letters thatlook like the following example TIN.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.

P

225

55

R

94

V

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202


Tire Information

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

402

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

P225/55R16 94V

Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel’s contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.(Methyl Tertiary Butyl

Ether)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

(methyl or woodalcohol)Your car was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

MTBE

ETHANOL

METHANOL

Oxygenated Fuels


If you are planning to take yourHonda outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Honda will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your car back intocompliance will require the replace-ment of several components, such asthe oxygen sensors and the threeway catalytic converter. These re-placements are not covered underwarranty.

Driving in Foreign Countries


＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in your car’sengine produces several byproducts.Some of these are carbon monoxide(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) andhydrocarbons (HC). Gasolineevaporating from the tank alsoproduces hydrocarbons. Controllingthe production of NOx, CO, and HCis important to the environment.Under certain conditions of sunlightand climate, NOx and HC react toform photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your car has a Positive CrankcaseVentilation System. This keepsgasses that build up in the engine’scrankcase from going into theatmosphere. The Positive Crankcase

Ventilation valve routes them fromthe crankcase back to the intakemanifold. They are then drawn intothe engine and burned.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

274

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Emissions Controls


The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your car. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newgenuine Honda replacement parts ortheir equivalent for repairs. Usinglower quality parts may increase theemissions from your car.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Engine Control Module (ECM)or the Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-

ing conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control, ExhaustGas Recirculation and Three WayCatalytic Converter. These foursystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) system takes some of theexhaust gas and routes it back intothe intake manifold. Adding exhaustgas to the air/fuel mixture reducesthe amount of NOx produced whenthe fuel is burned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Replacement PartsExhaust Emissions Controls

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls


Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your car away from high grass,dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your car’s three way catalyticconverter.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your car diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter



THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If you take your car for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

Make sure the car has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Keep the car in Park (automatictransmission) or Neutral (manualtransmission). Increase the enginespeed to 2,000 rpm and hold itthere until the temperature gaugerises to at least 1/4 of the scale(approximately 3 minutes).

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the car re-tested within the nexttwo or three days, you can conditionthe car for re-testing by doing thefollowing.

Testing of Readiness Codes


State Emissions Testing

408

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe car coast for several secondswithout using the acceleratorpedal or the brake pedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Honda dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 5th/6th (M/T). Donot use the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

State Emissions Testing


Customer Relations................................Information . 412

....................Warranty Coverages . 413Reporting Safety Defects

...........................(U.S. vehicles) . 414.....................Authorized Manuals . 415

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 411

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Relations Office.

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your carDate of purchaseMileage on your carYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thecar to you

394

Customer Relations Information

Warranty and Customer Relations412

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 250-4318

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from a Honda dealer.

Your new Honda is covered by thesewarranties:

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns the car.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

coversyour new car, except for the battery,emissions control systems, andaccessories, against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

these twowarranties cover your car’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of the car.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

genuine Honda Accessories arecovered under this warranty. Timeand mileage limits depend on thetype of accessory and other factors.Please read your warranty manualfor details.

covers all genuineHonda replacement parts againstdefects in materials and workman-ship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2003 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your car forprecise information on warrantycoverages. Your Honda’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warranty infor-mation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2003 WarrantyManual that came with your car.

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

New Car Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations 413

If you believe that your car has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of cars, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

Warranty and Customer Relations

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

414

＊

＊

＊

－

＊２００３

ＨＯＮ

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Honda dealer.

The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your car canbe obtained from Helm Incorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone number on the form. Formanuals prior to the year shown below, contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box07280, Detroit, Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

415

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Price

Each

$70.00

$40.00

$50.00

$44.00

$34.00

$29.00

$10.00

FREE

Form Description

2003 Honda Accord

Service Manual

2003 Honda Accord V6

Service Manual Supplement

2003 Honda Accord

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2003 Honda Accord

Body Repair Manual

2003 Honda Accord 2 Door

Owner’s Manual

2003 Honda Accord Navigation

System Owner’s Manual

2003 Honda Accord 2 Door

Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SDA00

61SDA01

61SDA00EL

61SDA30

31SDN600

31SDA700

31SDNQ00

HON-R

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation.

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your car.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

416

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

CONTINUED

Battery......Charging System Light . 62, 380

............................Jump Starting . 373..............................Maintenance . 324....................Specifications . 397, 399

..............................Before Driving . 223....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 46

.........................Beverage Holders . 112...................................Body Repair . 362

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 256

.............Break-in, New Linings . 224

....................Bulb Replacement . 348...........................................Fluid . 313

.......................................Parking . 110.................System Indicator . 63, 383........................Wear Indicators . 254

.............................Braking System . 254........................Break-in, New Car . 224

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 76........................Brights, Headlights . 74

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 348

..............................Brake Lights . 348

..............................Ceiling Light . 351................Door Courtesy Light . 351................Front Parking Lights . 346

.................................Headlights . 342.........High-mount Brake Light . 350

.................License Plate Lights . 349....................Specifications . 397, 399

...................................Spotlights . 351...............................Trunk Light . 353

....................Turn Signal Lights . 346................Vanity Mirror Lights . 351

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 342

...Accessories and Modifications . 232................................Accessories . 232

.Additional Safety Precautions . 233............................Modifications . 233

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.......................................Position) . 85

............Accessory Power Sockets . 116....................Additives, Engine Oil . 296

...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 49.....................Air Cleaner Element . 316

...........Air Conditioning . 122, 131, 138..............................Maintenance . 329

.........................Usage . 122, 131, 138.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 333.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 403........................Aluminum Wheels . 357

......................................Antifreeze . 299Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 64, 256...................................Operation . 255

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 212.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 84

..........................Appearance Care . 355..........................................Armrest . 111

................Audio System . 148, 163, 187...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 75...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 47

.............Automatic Speed Control . 214..............Automatic Transmission . 248

..................Capacity, Fluid . 396, 398.......Checking Fluid Level . 307, 308

.......................................Shifting . 248.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 248

................Shift Lever Positions . 248....................Shift Lock Release . 251

Index

A

B

I

＊

...................Capacities Chart . 396, 398.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56

......................................Cargo Net . 237.............................Carrying Cargo . 234

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii..................CD Changer . 156, 173, 196

.......................................CD Player . 154........................CD Pocket, Center . 113........................Certification Label . 394

............................................Chains . 338....................Changing a Flat Tire . 365

............Changing Engine Coolant . 301Changing Oil

........................................How to . 296.............................When to . 276, 284

...Charging System Indicator . 62, 380............Checklist, Before Driving . 240

.......................................Child Seats . 26.........................................LATCH . 43

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 42...................................Cleaner, Air . 316

Cleaning....................Aluminum Wheels . 357

...................................Carpeting . 358

......................................Exterior . 356.........................................Fabric . 359.......................................Interior . 358.......................................Leather . 359

...................................Seat Belts . 359...........................................Vinyl . 359

......................................Window . 360...............Climate Control System . 129

.........Clock, Setting the . 153, 171, 193...................................Clutch Fluid . 314

........................CO in the Exhaust . 406...................................Coin Pocket . 113

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 242..............................Compact Spare . 364

.................Console Compartment . 111...............Consumer Information . 412

.............Controls, Instruments and . 59Coolant

........................................Adding . 299....................................Checking . 230

.........................Proper Solution . 299...................Temperature Gauge . 70

....................Corrosion Protection . 361Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 405............Cruise Control Operation . 214

..........Customer Relations Office . 412

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 2, 60

................Daytime Running Lights . 76............Defects, Reporting Safety . 414

................Defogger, Rear Window . 79Defrosting the

....................Windows . 127, 136, 144

............................Dimensions . 396, 398...............Dimming the Headlights . 74

Dipstick.Automatic Transmission . 307, 308

..................................Engine Oil . 228..........................Directional Signals . 77

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 254.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 298

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 86

......................Power Door Locks . 86..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 400

Downshifting, Manual.....................Transmission . 243, 245

.......................................Drive Belt . 332

Index

C

D

II

CONTINUED

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5...........................................Driving . 239

....................................Economy . 231.........................In Bad Weather . 261

................In Foreign Countries . 404..Dual Temperature Control . 137, 145

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 330

..............................Economy, Fuel . 231............Emergencies on the Road . 363.............Battery, Jump Starting . 373...........Brake System Indicator . 383

................Changing a Flat Tire . 365.....Charging System Indicator . 380

..................Checking the Fuses . 386.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 379...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 381...Manually Closing Moonroof . 384

..................Overheated Engine . 376.........................Emergency Brake . 110

......................Emergency Flashers . 79......................Emergency Towing . 391

............Emergency Trunk Opener . 92.......................Emissions Controls . 405

.............Emissions Testing, State . 408Engine

.............................................Belt . 332....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 70

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 62, 381

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 379

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 294...............................Overheating . 376

....................Specifications . 397, 399

............Speed Limiter . 244, 246, 251.......................................Starting . 241

..Engine Speed Limiter . 244, 246, 251......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 403

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 405...............................Exhaust Fumes . 56

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 19

..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 356

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 359..................Fan, Interior . 122, 133, 143

Features, Comfort and..............................Convenience . 121

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 225Filters

................................Air Cleaner . 316.........................Dust and Pollen . 330

...............................................Oil . 2965-speed Manual Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 3105-speed Manual Transmission

................................Shifting the . 243.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 79

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 365Fluids

.Automatic Transmission . 307, 308..........................................Brake . 313.........................................Clutch . 314

......Manual Transmission . 310, 311..........................Power Steering . 315

..................Windshield Washer . 306.........................Folding Rear Seat . 100

.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 404..........................Four-way Flashers . 79

..............................Front Airbags . 9, 49

Index

E

F

III

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 342..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 79

........................................Headlights . 74........................................Aiming . 342

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 75............Daytime Running Lights . 76............Low Beams, Turning on . 74

.........................Reminder Chime . 74........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 342

...................................Turning on . 74..............................Head Restraints . 99

.....................Heating and Cooling . 122...............................Heated Mirror . 109

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 242HomeLink Wireless Control

........................................System . 218....................................Hood Latch . 318

.......................Hood, Opening the . 226...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 314

.................................Hydroplaning . 262

.................................................Fuel . 224......................Fill Door and Cap . 225

...........................................Gauge . 70................Octane Requirement . 224

...............................Oxygenated . 403........................Tank, Filling the . 225

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 386

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 231..........................................Gasohol . 403.........................................Gasoline . 224...........................................Gauge . 70

................Octane Requirement . 224........................Tank, Filling the . 225

................Gas Station Procedures . 225Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 70...............................................Fuel . 70

...............................Speedometer . 68.................................Tachometer . 68

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 248



..............................Glass Cleaning . 360........................................Glove Box . 93

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.....................................(GVWR) . 264

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 394Ignition

..............................................Keys . 82...........................................Switch . 84

............Timing Control System . 406........................Immobilizer System . 83

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 61

...............................Infant Restraint . 21......................................Infant Seats . 30

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 42...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 333

.................................Inside Mirror . 108.............................Inspection, Tire . 335

............................Instrument Panel . 61........Instrument Panel Brightness . 76

...........................Interior Cleaning . 358...............................Interior Lights . 117

........................................Introduction . i

Index

GH

I

IV

CONTINUED

........................Jacking up the Car . 367.......................................Jack, Tire . 366

................................Jump Starting . 373

..................................................Keys . 82

.......................Label, Certification . 394.................Lane Change, Signaling . 77

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 46.........................Leather, Cleaning . 359

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 342

.......................................Indicator . 61.........................................Parking . 74

..................................Turn Signal . 77.....................................Load Limit . 235

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 84Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 84............................Fuel Fill Door . 225

....................................Glove Box . 93...........................................Trunk . 91

................Low Coolant Level . 230, 299Lower Gear, Downshifting

......................................to a . 243, 245...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 379

Lubricant Specifications..................................Chart . 396, 398.........................................Luggage . 234

...................Neutral Gear Position . 250..................New Vehicle Break-in . 224

............Normal Shift Speeds . 244, 246..................NOTICE, Explanation of . ii

...............Numbers, Identification . 394

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 224.........................................Odometer . 69

Odometer/Outside Temperature......................................Indicator . 69

...............................Odometer, Trip . 70

..................................Maintenance . 271...Owner Maintenance Checks . 291

................................Record . 281, 289......................Required Indicator . 71

..........................................Safety . 272..............Schedule . 276-280, 284-288

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 381..........Manual Transmission . 243, 245

Manual Transmission...................................Fluid . 310, 311

...............................Meters, Gauges . 68...................Methanol in Gasoline . 403

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 108

.......................................Moonroof . 107......................Closing Manually . 384

...................................Operation . 107

Index

L M

N

O

J

K

V

＊

...................Radiator Overheating . 376Radio/CD Sound

.......................System . 148, 163, 187...........................Readiness Codes . 382

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 348............................Rear Seat Access . 98........................Rear Seat, Folding . 100

..........................Rear View Mirror . 108.................Rear Window Defogger . 79.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 94, 97

Recommended Shift................................Speeds . 244, 246

.............................Reminder Lights . 61.......................Remote Transmitter . 87

Replacement Information.................Air Cleaner Element . 316

..........................Engine Coolant . 301..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 330

................Engine Oil and Filter . 296..........................................Fuses . 386

................................Light Bulbs . 342............................Schedule . 276, 284

.......................Spark Plugs . 318, 321...........................................Tires . 336

.............................Wiper Blades . 327Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 48.................Reserve Tank, Coolant . 230

...............................Restraint, Child . 21..................Reverse Gear Position . 249

................................Rotation, Tire . 336

Oil........................Change, How to . 296..............Change, When to . 276, 284......................Checking Engine . 228..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 379

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 295

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 85..Operation in Foreign Countries . 404

............................Outside Mirrors . 108.....................Outside Temperature . 69

....................Overheating, Engine . 376.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 291

..........................Oxygenated Fuel . 403

..............Panel Brightness Control . 76........................Park Gear Position . 249

...........................................Parking . 253...............................Parking Brake . 110.................................Parking Lights . 74

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 253.............................PGM-FI System . 406

..................Polishing and Waxing . 357...................................Pollen Filter . 330

............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19

............................Protecting Adults . 13...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19........................Protecting Children . 21.......................Protecting Infants . 30

.......Protecting Larger Children . 38.........Protecting Small Children . 34

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 42

.............................Using LATCH . 43

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 46.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 414

Index

R

S

P

VI

＊ CONTINUED

.................................Safety Features . 7.....................................Airbags . 9, 49

..................................Door Locks . 11..........................Head Restraints . 11

.......................................Seat Belts . 8..................Seats and Seat-Backs . 11

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 57...............................Safety Messages . ii

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 46...............Additional Information . 46

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 47

.....................................Cleaning . 359................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16, 46

................................Maintenance . 48Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 46, 62...................System Components . 46

...............Use During Pregnancy . 19..................................Seat Heaters . 102

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 94............................Security System . 213

...................Select/Reset Knob . 69, 70...............................Serial Number . 394

...................Service Intervals . 276, 284

...........................Service Manual . 415

.........Service Station Procedures . 225..........Setting the Clock . 153, 171, 193

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 248........................Shift Lock Release . 251

....................................Side Airbags . 51...How Your Side Airbags Work . 51

How the Side Airbag Cutoff...........Indicator Light Works . 53

......................Side Curtain Airbags . 52How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 52...............................Signaling Turns . 77

....6-speed Manual Transmission . 245.................................Fluid Level . 311

.......................................Shifting . 245.......................Reverse Lockout . 246

.....................................Snow Tires . 338...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 356

................Sound System . 148, 163, 187Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 364....................Specifications . 397, 399

........Spark Plugs, Replacing . 318, 321...........Specifications Charts . 396, 398

................................Speed Control . 214

................Speed Limiter . 244, 246, 251

...................................Speedometer . 68..........SRS, Additional Information . 49

...Additional Safety Precautions . 55.....How Your Airbags Work . 49, 51

How Your SRS Indicator.......................................Works . 52

........................SRS Components . 49..................................SRS Service . 55

.............................SRS Indicator . 52, 63....START (Ignition Key Position) . 85

.......................Starting the Engine . 241In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 242................With a Dead Battery . 373

........Steam Coming from Engine . 376Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 80.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 84

Stereo Sound.......................System . 148, 163, 187

...........................Storing Your Car . 354........................................Sun Visor . 114

........................Sunglasses Holder . 116

Index

VII

Supplemental Restraint System......................................Servicing . 55

.........................SRS Indicator . 52, 63...................System Components . 49

..................................Synthetic Oil . 295

.....................................Tachometer . 68......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 348

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 363Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 400.....Emissions Control Systems . 405

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 403Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 407.......................Temperature Gauge . 70

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 42..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 407

..........Time, Setting the . 153, 171, 193....................................Timing Belt . 332....................................Tire Chains . 338

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 365...........................Tire Information . 402

...............................................Tires . 333..............................Air Pressure . 333

.........................Checking Wear . 335..........................Compact Spare . 364

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 400......................................Inflation . 333

..................................Inspection . 335...................................Replacing . 336

......................................Rotating . 336...........................................Snow . 338

....................Specifications . 397, 399...................Tools, Tire Changing . 365

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 263

................Emergency Wrecker . 391..Traction Control System (TCS) . 258

...TCS Activation Indicator . 64, 259......................TCS Indicator . 64, 258

...............TCS ON/OFF Switch . 259Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,......................Automatic . 307, 308

Checking Fluid Level,...........................Manual . 310, 311

..........Fluid Selection . 307, 310, 312..............Identification Number . 395

.............Shifting the Automatic . 248..........Shifting the Manual . 243, 245

.....................................Treadwear . 400

.......................................Trip Meter . 70................................................Trunk . 91

....................Emergency Opener . 92.........................................Hooks . 237

.................................Opening the . 91...................Open Monitor Light . 65

....................................Turn Signals . 77

.....................Underside, Cleaning . 361Unexpected, Taking Care

..........................................of the . 363....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 400

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 224.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 358

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 298

Index

U

T

VIII

＊

＊

................................Vanity Mirror . 115.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 235

.............Vehicle Dimensions . 396, 398....Vehicle Identification Number . 394

.............................Vehicle Storage . 354.................................................VIN . 394

...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 359..................................Viscosity, Oil . 295

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 57

..................Warranty Coverages . 413Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 306.....................................Operation . 79

.........................................Washing . 356..................Waxing and Polishing . 357

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 80............Alignment and Balance . 335

..........................Compact Spare . 364......................................Wrench . 366

Windows.............................Auto Reverse . 104

.....................................Cleaning . 360................Operating the Power . 103

...........................Rear, Defogger . 79Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 77

.......................................Washers . 79Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 327.....................................Operation . 77

....................................Worn Tires . 335.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 391

: U.S. only

Index

W

V

IX

5-speed manual transmission:

6-speed manual transmission:

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

5-speed/6-speed ManualTransmission Fluid:

Spare Tire Pressure:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (seepages and ).

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher. Honda Manual Transmission

Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (seepages and ).

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Capacity:

2.0 US qt (1.9 )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )2.3 US qt (2.2 )

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

Front:

Rear:

All other modelsFront:

Rear:

294

307 309

4-cylinder LX

EX-V6 with M/TFront:

Rear:

310 311

313

315

2003 accord coupe online reference owner's manual...

Documents